JP2021112327A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing an instruction for urging a player to shoot game balls in a predetermined direction.SOLUTION: State control means in a game machine can perform control from a normal state to a special state on the basis of a special display result when the special display result differing from a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state. Then, plural kinds of pieces of information including determination result information for permitting identification of control to an advantageous state when determination means determines that the advantageous state occurs, and special information for permitting identification of control to a special state when the determination means determines that the special state occurs can be transmitted to performance execution means, a read-ahead performance can be executed based on the determination result information when receiving the determination result information, and execution of a read-ahead performance based on the determination result information is restricted when receiving the determination result information after receiving the special information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-49

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the fact that seven symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in a decorative symbol display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-147575

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, during the execution of the jackpot start effect, the player is configured to give a right-handed instruction to urge the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle. There was still room for improvement in the instruction to urge the player to launch the game ball in such a predetermined direction.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction for urging a player to launch a gaming ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
A light emitting means for notifying that the game medium is launched toward the second flow path is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
Moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80649, and the winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area is used. When the game medium wins a prize and the execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, display symbols) are variably displayed on the variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined game value is given based on the display result. There is a pachinko game machine that enhances the game's interest by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, the pachinko gaming machine becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, there is a gaming machine that controls the variable display to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.
As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine that controls a special state without going through a jackpot gaming state has been proposed.

However, there was room for improvement in control when transitioning to a state.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving control of state transition and improving gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display, and when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, pachinko gaming). Machine 1 etc.)
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing during hit fluctuation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the parent table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the child table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine when it recovers from the electric power cutoff during the fanfare production by hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during one round of big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after one round of big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 3 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from a power failure during the final round of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure example of the time saving type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving fanning production period. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving start time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving end time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the remaining hold period end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hold change determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of a miss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving fanning effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the time saving fanning production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a return effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. This is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and when it is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the information output processing. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of various signals output by an external information output process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special variable winning ball device which concerns on the feature part 063AK in the state which the big winning opening is controlled in the closed state. (A) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution part which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution member which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A)-(c) is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game ball which entered the distribution part which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the distribution member which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the small hit start effect time which concerns on a feature part 063AK, and the timing when a game ball enters a distribution part. (A) is a timing chart of the effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature unit 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining whether or not an effect is executed and an effect mode corresponding to the small hit variation related to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a timing chart of the time saving suggestion effect related to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the time saving suggestion symbol which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the normal passage fanning effect corresponding to the 1st special figure game which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining a normal passage fanning effect corresponding to the second special figure game according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a figure for demonstrating the time-saving time-passing fanning effect related to the feature portion 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special figure display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special figure display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the jackpot type which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the small hit type which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit type determination table according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving variation pattern determination table for a normal state which concerns on a feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the small hit start effect waiting time determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening preprocessing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hit end designation command determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the passage notification effect waiting time determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the decorative symbol which becomes the small hit combination which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decoration symbol determination table for a small hit for a normal state according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit time determination decoration symbol determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the waiting process for hitting a special figure according to the feature unit 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start effect time determination table related to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit middle production process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end effect processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) to (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state related to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state related to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the normal hold change determination table which concerns on the modification of the characteristic part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a limited time pending change determination table according to a modified example of the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation according to a modified example of the feature unit 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the normal figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a figure which shows the special figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process of a feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure interlocking effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving notification setting processing. It is a timing chart which shows the production content at the time of time saving transition of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotation display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing a movement display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) is a diagram showing a blinking mode of the fourth symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification.

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "first special symbol". Also called "2 special design" or "2nd special design". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. When the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is related to the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

[Modification example of basic explanation]
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

<Explanation of feature 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 075F of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature section 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on the feature part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Usually referred to as a grand prize opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in the space between the gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is equipped with a large winning opening door, and by sliding open and close between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 in the horizontal direction, the route to the normal large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Will be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 10-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Form a V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is located on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the path to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. .. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the gaming board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided above the attacker in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and the left side of the image display device 5 are provided. It is equipped with a board left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d has a character attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this example) when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks when the movable body 32 is stopped or in an operating state. "XXX") is made to emit light. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light in the vicinity of the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light in the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a housing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the housing imitating the character on the right side of the image display device 5 is made to emit light. .. The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a housing that imitates a character, similarly to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the panel right lamp 075F009F and the panel left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a frame lamp composed of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. To be equipped.

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp in a counterclockwise direction from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to emit light in the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special drawing LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and the ordinary symbol indicator 20, as shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED substrate that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED substrate 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (a), the special figure LED substrate 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 showing the variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable showing the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and special figure 2 storage display unit indicating the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. 075F024, the normal figure storage display unit 075F025 indicating the number of reserved normal figures, the normal figure display unit 075F026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 that urges the player to hit right. It is provided with a probability variation display unit 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot, a time reduction display unit 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 075F027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of a special figure or a normal symbol, the result, the current game state, the number of holds, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 075F020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing the right-handed display unit 075F030 by a lighting means such as an LED. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left region of the game area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A exists ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V Grand Prize) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit right. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out by inserting a game ball into the normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player hits the right while the display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, so that the V-large winning opening is opened. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probabilistic state. For this reason, the player can have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the number of second reserved storages, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status of the second special figure or A special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 showing a display result and a right-handed display unit 075F055 for urging the player to hit the right side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of. Hereinafter, expressing the fluctuation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, expressing the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is confirmed, and the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L , It is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) by the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special drawing LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 075F005D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays. It constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second hold storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed, and a third display area 075F005Sb including a display of the first reserved storage number and a display of the second reserved storage number. is doing.

Of these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and variable display of decorative symbols can be executed. It has become. Further, a small symbol 075F005M having a size smaller than each decorative symbol is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small symbols are the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left", the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C in the "middle", and the decorative symbol display area on the "right". The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols displayed on the 5R are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 075F005M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 075F005M is the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern in the part. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display is provided.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(Big hit type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 10-6, in the hit type table, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state are shown for each type of hit in the jackpot. , And the number of open times (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1st round, and the second round is also referred to as the 2nd round. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize (for example, a control or lid that shortens the time to open the lid for opening and closing the V jackpot to be shorter than a predetermined time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In a normal jackpot, the condition that such a low accuracy and high base state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 fluctuation displays and the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 5R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have a common decorative symbol that stops when a jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot share the same production mode (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) of the fanfare effect performed when the jackpot occurs, and during the round of the jackpot game state. (For example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot has occurred as far as the stopped decorative pattern, the fanfare effect, and the round effect are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variation big hit, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 4Rth). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state.

As described above, in the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation jackpot has occurred halfway through the round, so these jackpots are also referred to as chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variation jackpot, the V jackpot opens in the predetermined round (9Rth in the present embodiment) as in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a decorative pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs, a fanfare production mode (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) and a round production performed during the round of the jackpot game state. Is different from the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability variation jackpot is also referred to as a special bonus.

(Each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type to be either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 10R probability variation jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In the present embodiment, whether or not the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). Then, out of a plurality of types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot as a jackpot game state, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10R probability variation jackpot, which jackpot is to be selected is based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is used using the variation pattern determination random number (random 4). Is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, in the case of loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a fluctuation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type differs between the time saving state and the non-time saving state (in the time saving state, compared with the case where the time saving state is not obtained). Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set high), so that when the time is shortened, compared to when the time is not shortened. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change state) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value in the normal jackpot determination table, and the right of FIG. 10-8 (B) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variation jackpot determination table are set. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 10-8 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in) is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

10-8 (B) and 10-8 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10-8 (B) is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8 (C) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8 (B), numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, such as "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and , The jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10R probability variation jackpot" is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8 (C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and 10-8, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol. The special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 display a stopped big hit symbol by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. Can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot symbol can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the percentage of "10R probability variation jackpot" selected for the jackpot of the second special symbol is higher than that of the jackpot type that can be selected in the first special symbol, and the player The rate at which a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is selected is high.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variation jackpot is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined. Loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variation jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variation jackpot designation command, or these are collectively referred to as 8C system commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the power failure recovery (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability change state specification command for designating the background of the probability change state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of a 5R normal jackpot. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designated command, the jackpot start 2 designated command, and the jackpot start 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The command specified while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big prize opening is also called an A2 command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R normal jackpot. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designated command, the jackpot end 2 designated command, and the jackpot end 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command that specifies that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

The command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variable pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (second special). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the symbol (step 075FS001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step 075FS002). If a predetermined period does not elapse from the suspension of fluctuation (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step 075FS004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (third). Data indicating "first" is set in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the 1 special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating the "first" is set or the data indicating the "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10-8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot judgment values is probablely changed between the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set) in which a large number of jackpot judgment values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set), which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 10-8 (C). One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds them using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and 10-8 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type when the jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the loss pattern variation pattern. Select the type judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select any one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. To decide.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated to correspond to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbol (step 075FS301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 075F021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Further, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds are obtained for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 4th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5), which is the jackpot display time, is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step 075FS311 (N in step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability change flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the transition of the game state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability / low base state), and in step 075FS316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS316), and the processing is terminated.

(Big hit pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process proceeds to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process is performed. To finish.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step 075FS605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V open winning opening (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), the solenoid 075F083 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning area is set (step 075FS704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the probability variation determination flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time reduction flag indicating that the time is shortened is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which of the probabilistic change, the time saving, and the normal gaming state is in the probabilistic change state specification command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Production processing during big hit)
Next, the processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the effect control CPU 120 when the data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot ends are set. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, the control of the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data set next (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display the image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5. .. Further, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / blinking / extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continuously controlled according to the set process data contents. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the process corresponding to the fanfare effect is to execute the fanfare effect under the control of the effect device. Set the data. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is used to urge the player to right-handed. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the big winning opening opening designated command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each big hit round, the effect control device executes the effect during the round as follows. In order to do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of a 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set the process data of. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot opening designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

The process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-41) when the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening opening designated command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. To set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the V notice that the next 4R is the V open round is announced. Process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 10-42) is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103). The jackpot round (3R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after opening the large winning opening after 3R of the 5R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 10-43) aiming at the V that aims at the thing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A203). The jackpot round (3R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set. The effect aiming at V is a guidance display using an image display relating to the V large winning opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the production aiming at V, an image urging the player to hit right is displayed so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V large winning opening which is a specific area. In the production aiming at V, an image pointing to the V large winning opening itself, which is a specific area, may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V large winning opening, which is a specific area, may be displayed. , An image may be displayed that points to the route leading to the V-large winning opening, which is a specific area.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A104 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 continues to aim at V and execute the effect (see FIGS. 10-44). Set the process data for. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104). The jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A108 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 8R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs a V advance notice effect to announce that the next 9R is the V open round. Set the process data to execute. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108). The jackpot round (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the big winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V big winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the production aiming at V that aims at that. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A208). The jackpot round (8R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the process data for continuously aiming at V and executing the effect is set. .. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A109). The big hit round (9R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aiming at V) according to the specified round during the big hit is set.

Further, when the output control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the output control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect under the control of the effect device as shown below. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIG. 10-44) when the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) is received from the CPU 103 during the 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. ..

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets the process data for executing the V winning effect.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 has an ending effect (FIGS. 10-46, FIG. 10) indicating the end of the jackpot game state. -47) Set the process data to execute.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103. Perform the production of.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. Regarding the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 075F has the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game of the part related to the feature unit 075F will be described below. do.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first launches a gaming ball by left-handing toward the first flow path passing through the left region of the gaming region. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handed characters (for example, "right-handed") are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting, for example, a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10 times in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is open at the 1st to 3rd R and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is open only at the 4th R. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize, the V prize is not won. Further, since the V prize is not won, the effect of aiming at V is not executed at the 4th R, and the same background image as the 1R is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and at the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the hit is a probability variation jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion effect, it is notified that it is a normal jackpot instead of a probability variation jackpot. After that, the V prize opening is opened on the 4th R, but the V prize does not occur, and the normal large winning opening is opened on the subsequent 5R, and the ending effect is executed when the 5R is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 4th R. Specifically, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the V probability variation suggests whether or not the 2R is a probability variation jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is a V open round is executed. In the 4th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 5th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 5th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds, and at the 7th round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is executed is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal big hit and 150 times in the case of 5R probability change big hit and 10R probability change big hit). Will be done. Further, in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state is in the probability variation state over a predetermined number of times (150 times) fluctuations controlled in the time saving state. Is controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the low accuracy high base state, and in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the high accuracy high base state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal figure is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" in the normal state game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening more frequently and the second start is started. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As a type of jackpot in the second special figure game, as described above, there is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 has continued since the first hit.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Since it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, as in the case of the first hit, the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time saving state and a probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probabilistic state or time saving state after the jackpot round is completed, and the player will be in the probabilistic state or time saving after the jackpot round per consecutive chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probabilistic state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 is also completed. As a result, the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
The timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21. FIG. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the hit fluctuation. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the jackpot. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 issues a hold storage number designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (C1 system command), background specification command (95 system command), symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the first hold storage display area 075F005D by specifying the first hold storage number based on the hold storage number designation command, or the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051. To update. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the special symbol variation starts based on the symbol variation designation command, and sets the effect start timing. Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence / absence of a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the display result designation command, and determines the decorative pattern according to the identification. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the effect content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach) based on the variable pattern designation command. Set the type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 issues a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120 at t3 thereafter. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image congratulating the big hit on the image display device 5 or outputs a sound congratulating the big hit from the speakers 8L and 8R as a fanfare effect. Set the process data for. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image prompting right-handed striking on the image display device 5 and outputs a sound prompting right-handed striking from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed striking promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the big hit round starts at t4 after that, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening, and at the same time, the production control CPU 120 is given a command to specify that the big winning opening is open (A101 command). To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the first round.

After that, when the 1st round is completed at t5, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A201 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A102 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the second round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-41) based on the command (A102 command) during the opening of the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R is completed at t7, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A202 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 3Rs start at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A103 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3rd round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V notice effect (see FIGS. 10-42) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the 3rd round is completed at t9, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the inter-round effect between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 10-43) aiming at V based on the designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening, and at the same time, the effect control CPU 120 is given a command (A104 command) to open the large winning opening. To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V notice effect (see FIG. 10-42) based on a command (A104 command) during which the winning opening is open, and then aims at V (see FIG. 10-43). Set the process data to execute.

After that, when the V prize is generated at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round is completed at t12, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A204 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 5th R starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A105 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round at the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th R is completed at t14, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A205 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic change state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command according to whether or not the number of reserved storages exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved storages exceeds 0, the CPU 103 specifies the number of reserved storages (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 10-60) that can identify that the game is not being performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative symbol or a small symbol on the image display device 5, or stops the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 10-60, and the game is such that the game is not performed, such as a character image or a logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting mode of the lamp. In the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L). , The right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A). It is represented by.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all lit as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). It is expressed in the aspect of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each light / blink / blink in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by a hatching mode as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C).

[Direction mode of pachinko game machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. 10-23 to 10-33 and 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory views showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (a), when the lost symbol is stopped due to the change of the special symbol of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stop of the lost symbol. After that, when there is a first hold storage number, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) to the effect control CPU 120. ), Display result specification command (8C system command), and fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (for example). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-23 (b1) to 10-24 (b3) as a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a background designation command (95 series command). Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-23 (b1) and 10-24 (b3) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting. Send commands (FD commands). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-38 (d2) as a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-24 (c1) and 10-38 (d2) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

Here, the fanfare production will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare production includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The blessing part is a production part in which a production for congratulating the big hit is executed, and as will be described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image for congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5. The display, the sound for congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. The name display part is a production part that notifies the player that the jackpot round will start by notifying the name of the generated jackpot gaming state, and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred. As will be described later in -24 (c2) and (c3), a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state may be displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The right-handed promotion part is an effect part that encourages the player to hit right-handed, and as will be described later in FIGS. 10-24 (c4) to 10-33 (c29), the image display of characters and figures is used. A large right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to hit right is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and the symbol is confirmed, and then receives the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , The fanfare production is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot opens and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), as a blessing part in the fanfare production, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed as an image. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that the sound displayed on the device 5 or congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode congratulates the big hit. Or something. Further, as a right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character of "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5. The production is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect is an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, "Congratulations!" Along with the character image. It is displayed on the layer on the front side (the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko game machine 1 side) rather than the character image). Further, in the fanfare effect, a sound prompting right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed hitting promotion effect, the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 promotes right-handed hitting. (Lights up in this example). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), and lights the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the small right-handed display promotion effect is based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). The image display device 5 displays an image composed of the figures and characters in the above, and an image congratulating the big hit. At this time, the image composed of the figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect located on the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big hit. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. Will be done. At that time, first, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display / off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect based on the received background specification command. Upon completion, the image display device 5 displays the background image in the normal state. The image composed of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055. Becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare production, a part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!" "CHANGE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, the sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare production, following FIG. 10-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example). Among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!", "BONUS !!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 10-24 (c4) to FIG. 10-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character "right-handed"). ) Is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5, and a large right-handed promotion effect is executed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs guidance light emission that prompts the player to hit the right side by moving the light emitting portion of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In the present embodiment, the light emitting portion literally refers to a portion that emits light, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lit lamp is located is referred to as a light emitting portion, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the light emitting part. In another example, the light emitting portion refers to a portion that emits light with high brightness. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located is emitted. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light emitting place is located may not be called the light emitting place. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the production time of each of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is specified. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec and then a large right-handed promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right-handed promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 decides to repeat the large right-handed promotion effect of 2000 msec twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, each time of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is subdivided and referred to in each time zone. The grandchild table is specified.

Here, the grandchild table W11 common to the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated for the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. For the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, the grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, the grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and the grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory views showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows the data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all lamps are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). The data of turning off (0x000000) is specified in. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10-2 are specified for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, in FIGS. 10-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, the data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and the data (000) at the timing of ending lighting are used. On the other hand, a broken line circle is attached.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T1, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T2, and then the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T3. The second lamp lights up, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T4, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T5, and then the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T6. The lamp lights up, then the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T7, then the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T8, and then the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T9. Then, at T10, the 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the 4th lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T46, then the 3rd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T47, and then the 2nd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T54, the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect after all the lamps are turned off at T56 is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time (1000 msec). It is T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L, and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If the grandchild table W11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored is used, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), it starts from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , Frame right lamp Up to the 8th lamp of 075F009R, the frame lamp lights in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. The large right-handed promotion effect by such a frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all of them are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Data for turning off the lamp (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data are specified for each of the above. Further, in FIGS. 10-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and data (000) at the timing of ending lighting. ) Is marked with a broken line.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T4, and then the movable body lamp at T5. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Turns off. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and then kept off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. It is (T57). Further, as compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L can be used. While it is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. After that, each lamp continues to light in seven colors, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Turns off. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is lit in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side, starting from the lighting of the left X, and then to the lamp of the middle X and the lamp of the right X. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 10-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on, and the data is turned off. The data of (0x0000000) is specified.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec with respect to 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec to determine a predetermined value. The color change of the pattern (for example, seven colors) is repeated.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 320 msec to be turned on, and the data of extinguishing (0x0000000) is specified as the data. There is.

When the large right-handed promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. The attacker lamp 9c is made to repeat the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to it a plurality of times, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned off by referring to the grandchild table A11c over the last 320 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on, then the frame lamp is turned off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Will turn off. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Further, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the color is turned off at the beginning, the color of a predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and then the color is turned off, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on 3 It is not necessary to prepare data for all the time from the beginning to the end for lighting of 2000 msec by repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for the repetition of the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle while dividing it into scenarios. , It is sufficient to prepare the data of only the repeating part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), an effect mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" is displayed overlaid on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" continues to be displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the blinking attacker lamp 9c is also turned off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. As a result, a series of first large right-handed promotion effects is completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second large right-handed promotion effect starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamp 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In the second large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect. As a result, when the game shifts to the big hit round after the big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in the big hit round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second large right-handed promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks / turns off in the same manner as the first large right-handed promotion effect. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to right-handed in a manner that emphasizes it more than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, by executing the large right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound (for example, a cure sound effect) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect, which is effective for the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed strikes, in the second large right-handed strike promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed strike promotion effect, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. Can be prevented from interfering with.

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion effect, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to appear gradually in stages, and moreover, the right-handed hitting is effectively promoted by lighting or blinking the lamp by the game effect lamp 9. Yes, the effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). For example, the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect appears one character at a time, but all the character images appear at once in the character image in the name image in the big hit game state. In addition, the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect is larger than that of all the character images in the name image in the big hit game state. Further, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big hit game state is displayed and the player is notified that the big hit has been achieved, the player can be notified by further emphasizing the right-handed hit by the big right-handed promotion effect.

Since the attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and aims at the time of launching the game ball, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a flashy color such as seven colors that the player can easily recognize and blinks. It is possible to draw more attention to the player's target. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without blinking.

In the following example, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R probability variation jackpot, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning effect are not executed, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is turned off and the second big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the switch to the big hit round is switched as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually reduced by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command), a series of effect data up to the stage shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-39 (d3) and 10-40 (e4) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in the image display called "transition". "Transition" is a switch that is inserted between the first cut and the second cut when the scene of the video is switched from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It is an effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to the second degree (for example, 0) which is lower than the first degree. % Or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 100% (first degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 50% to 0% (second degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) opaquely, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-ins. When the opacity (which can be said to be opaque) is changed instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned% value is reversed. That is, in the fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) higher than the second degree. ) Will be changed over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in the fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99) higher than the first degree. %) Is changed over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) transparently, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-outs. When changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), in the fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is set to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) To a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) lower than the first degree, over a predetermined time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!" By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% in the state where the rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the characters "Right-handed !!" The image is gradually made transparent to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen located behind the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering it to, the background image during the jackpot round is gradually made opaque to make it easier to see (fade in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer of the screen.

As a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". Crossfade is, for example, by fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. As an appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image always displayed in the second layer of the screen located on the back side. Is shown once during the switching from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, so that it is different from the method such as crossfade.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without receiving. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or deteriorated, such as the image of the small right-handed promotion effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears due to fade-in, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the big winning opening is usually opened. , A background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed. Furthermore, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. As described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect has already been completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during 1R, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. Arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the first round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A201 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), the large winning opening is normally kept closed during the round, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, it continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A102 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2nd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-41 (e5) and 10-42 (e8) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed during 2R. Specifically, the character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed together with the image prompting the operation of the push button 31B so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability variation suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestion effect, the V is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. A character image of "Success !!" is displayed as an effect to notify that it is a probabilistic jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability variation suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the second round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A202 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), during the round, the large winning opening is normally kept closed, and the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is overlapped with the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. The text image of "Success !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A103 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to 10-43 (e12) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-42 (e10) and 10-43 (e12) is not triggered by the effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened and the V notice effect is executed. Specifically, the character image of "grab V in the next round !!" is displayed together with the character image so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3Rs, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is overlapped with the character image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The text image of "Grab V in the next round !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3Rs are completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A203 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect aiming at V during the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), during the rounds, the effect is executed aiming at V while the large winning opening is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large) is a target (place) aimed at the player by right-handed so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the effect aimed at V, it is possible to urge the player to right-handed to let the game ball enter the V large winning opening by using the image display related to the V large winning opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A104 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and 10-44 (e15) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large winning opening is opened, and the production is continuously aimed at V. As a result, the player will aim for the V-large winning opening by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during 4R, the effect of aiming at V is executed, and the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the game ball enters the V large winning opening and the V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) based on the probability variation determination device pass designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e16) and 10-45 (e18) is not triggered by the effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V prize effect is executed, the V prize is generated by overlapping the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The image of "V" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round is completed, the V large winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A204 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), the V large winning opening and the normal large winning opening remain closed during the round, and overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and further, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A105 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-45 (e19) and 10-46 (e21) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal grand prize opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner is continued. An image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during 5R, the effect during the round is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be in the upper right. (Arrows and letters) are displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening. Further, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-46 (f1) and 10-47 (f4) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect is started, an image for selecting the stage in the probability change state after the big hit game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image (in this example, a character image of “Dream RUSH !!”) indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character image. It is displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), the immersive suppression notification effect is executed during the ending effect. Specifically, an image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game. Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately." Is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. At the time of consecutive hits, a game result image showing the result of the game in the big hit game state (for example, the number of prize balls) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first hit. Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), an image for preventing forgetting to take a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

When there is a second hold storage number after the ending effect is completed, the CPU 103 specifies the hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command. Set based on (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, in the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop.

When there is a second hold storage number after the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command) and a background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , The symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) as a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), and so on. Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g3) and 10-49 (g5) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group notice effect is executed as a notice effect during the jackpot fluctuation. The group notice effect is a specific symbol that disappears after making it difficult to see the reach symbol by the appearance of objects such as characters in stages or at once on the screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes a match (for example, 777) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes it difficult to see the design is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the effect image. Arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the production image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed striking effect or the player promotes the small right-handed striking due to the display of the production image such as the group notice. The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a big hit (10R probability variation big hit) occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command). To send. Since the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed display lighting command (FD command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Yattane !!") is displayed on the image display device 5. Alternatively, a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be a lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS !!" in this example) showing the name of the jackpot game state that occurred after the fanfare effect was started is the image display device 5. The sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. In addition, in the case of consecutive chan hits per special figure 2, since the large right-handed promotion effect has already been executed when the special figure 1 is hit, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further. , The frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as V notice effect, V aiming effect, and V winning effect are executed during the round as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-46, and when the big hit round ends. , The ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the probability change state after the big hit game state is controlled again. In this series of games, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and a fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display units 075F055 of the unit 075F050 keeps lighting. Eventually, when the probability change state after the big hit game state ends and the normal state is controlled without the big hit occurring, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display / off designation command to the effect control CPU 120 for the effect control. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Turn off each of the parts 075F055. As a result, the player will hit the left again in the normal state.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from power failure]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from the power failure during the fanfare effect according to the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power failure shown in FIG. 10-51 assumes a power failure 1 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10-51, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). The state of -24 (c1)) and the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" in this example) are displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2)). (State), only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is "right-handed! If a power failure occurs in any of the states in which the character image of "!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when receiving the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A101 command), the effect image in 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!"), and a name image showing the name of the big hit game state (in this example, "CHANGE BONUS !!" (Character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed !!" added to the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs before the large right-handed promotion effect is executed or before the large right-handed promotion effect is completed, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, at the very least, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right immediately after recovering from the power failure, and he forgets to hit right and cannot usually let the game ball enter the grand prize opening. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-52 assumes a power interruption 2 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when receiving the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. If a prize ball is obtained during the subsequent round, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, for example, 10 pt is added for every 10 pieces obtained. The point image is not limited to the one displayed at 0 pt after returning from the power failure, and the point may not be known by the predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-53 causes the power supply 3 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, when a power failure occurs in a state where an image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when receiving the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-54 assumes a power interruption 4 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestion effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), the image is displayed. After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-55 is a power interruption 5 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, when a power failure occurs in the state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 2R (the state of FIG. 10-42 (e9)), the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when recovering from the power failure during the round after 3 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-56 causes the power supply 6 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3Rs and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, when a power failure occurs in the state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 3R (the state of FIG. 10-43 (e13)), the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the effect aiming at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control Based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, the CPU 120 aims at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) and executes the effect. It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the V grand prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during the four rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-57 assumes a power interruption 7 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, an image corresponding to the effect of aiming at V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. Is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-44 (e16)), and if a power failure occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to "recovering ...". The character image of is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done. Further, when a power failure occurs while aiming at V and performing a small right-handed promotion effect as in 4R, and as shown in FIG. 10-51 described above, it is small together with a large right-handed promotion effect. In the case where a power failure occurs while executing the right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed while the effect aiming at V and the large right-handed promotion effect are not executed after recovering from the power failure in common with each other. Is at least running. Therefore, in a common manner in any situation, it is possible to urge the player to hit right at least immediately after recovering from the power failure.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after 4 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-58 causes the power supply 8 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-58, when a power failure occurs in a state (state of FIG. 10-45 (e18)) in which an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the final round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power failure shown in FIG. 10-59 assumes a power failure 9 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 10). When a power failure occurs in the state of −46 (e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of “Recovering…” is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it becomes the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the final round of the big hit, the small right-handed promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player will be notified. It is possible to encourage right-handed hits and prevent forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-60 assumes a power interruption 10 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-60, among the ending effects, an image for selecting a stage in the probability variation state after the big hit game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-46 (f1)), a character. A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (state in FIG. 10-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the immersive suppression notification effect, and the result of the game in the jackpot game state are shown. A state in which the game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and an image for preventing forgetting to remove the card owned by the player are displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (state of FIG. 10-47 (f4)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the character image of "Recovering ..." is turned on by turning on the power. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, when there is a hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , Waits until the display result specification command (8C system command) and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are received, and when these commands are received, the hold storage number specification command (C1 system command, C2 system command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 series command), FIG. 10-48 (g1) shows. An effect image corresponding to such a fluctuation of a special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when there is no hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the designated command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designated command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial symbol ("123" as the decorative symbol and the small symbol in this example) stopped. ..

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the ending, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to win the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the big hit game state by forgetting to hit right. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by the feature section 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature unit 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
After that, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the third guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)). The part that displays the image corresponding to the production and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the game medium has changed from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area to the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), V is aimed at and produced. The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 10-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
After that, in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2). ), While ending the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area (for example, FIG. 10-44 (for example, FIG. 10-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to the effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 10-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
After that, by receiving the 1R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-38). (D1), (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3Rs are completed (for example, a command designated after opening the large winning opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the production aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, by receiving the V passage command (for example, the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-44). As shown in (e16), aiming at V and ending the image display corresponding to the effect, while continuing the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 10-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. It is possible to make sure that the player is recognized, and then, while ending the large right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is continued as it is so as not to appeal to the player that the player is excessively right-handed. In addition, the production of aiming for V to aim at the V big winning opening is executed from the time when the V big winning opening is still closed, and by continuing as it is even after the V big winning opening is opened, V It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming at the big winning opening and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning opening. Further, after the V prize is generated and the V large prize opening is closed, the player can be prevented from giving unnecessary promotion notification by aiming at V and ending the effect. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is always required to hit right-handed even after the V-winning occurs before the V-large winning opening is opened. Can be prompted. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right. In addition, when an electric power failure occurs while the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the effect is supported by aiming at V. In both cases when a power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the text image of "Recovering ..." and the small image after the power is turned on. Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to at least urge the player to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if a power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (for example, FIG. 10-24 (c25)). Including the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in c1).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the first guidance display and during a predetermined period during a predetermined period during which a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed. The second guidance display is performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
In the period after the predetermined period, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a jackpot as shown in FIGS. 10-39 (e1) to 10-46 (e21)). The part that does not display the image corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect during the round, but continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect),
In a special state (for example, a probability change state, a time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after a big hit as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect in the probabilistic state),
The second guide display is not affected by the background image switching display (for example, the fade-out and fade-in switching display) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group notice effect) (for example, the image display by the group notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5)). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. Make sure to recognize it, and during the subsequent big hit round, end the big right-handed promotion effect while continuing the small right-handed promotion effect as it is so as not to appeal to the player excessively right-handed. Can be done. In addition, the player can always be encouraged to hit right by continuously executing the small right-handed promotion effect even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state is completed. Furthermore, after the big hit occurs, the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the big hit round after the fanfare effect is executed does not affect the small right-handed promotion effect, and the big hit game state is Since the small right-handed promotion effect is not affected by the image display such as the group notice effect performed in the probable change state or the time-saving state after the end, the player can always be encouraged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display in the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, to display an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), after the start of the big hit round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. When this happens, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not output sound in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so that the sound is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed during the big hit round. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display in the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, to display an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), after the start of the big hit round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
The guidance means is in a state different from the advantageous state, and in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is displayed. When the specific display result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot around the special figure 2, the frame lamp promotes a large right-handed strike. The part that does not light in the manner corresponding to).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so that the sound is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed during the big hit round. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display in the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after the light emitting means is turned off (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, the light is turned off once and then hit to the right. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to FIGS. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R are used to promote a large right-handed strike. The part that does not output sound in the corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display in the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means
After turning off the light emitting means, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after the light is turned off once, it corresponds to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous chan jackpot per special figure 2, the frame lamp responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the large right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). In addition, characters appear step by step, and the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he is hitting right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second time. Regarding the subsequent right-handed promotion, no sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. At the same time, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onward. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then to the right. The sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the striking promotion, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. Sound is output and no sound is output in conjunction with the third right-handed promotion. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to each of the first and second right-handed promotion. Note that the sound data includes only sound data linked to one right-handed promotion, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. .. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice. .. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c3)). As shown in the above, after turning off all the lamps of the frame lamp, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect).

Specifically, since all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, the player is encouraged to strike right-handed more easily and effectively. Can be done.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on the data defined by the lighting data table.
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance emission, and a child table (for example, a child table) that indicates a grandchild table in which the data referred to by the light emitting means is defined. , The child table shown in FIG. 10-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined by referring to the child table. Turn on / blink / turn off by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently turned on in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not perform the guided light emitting is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, so that a grandchild table is provided. do not have. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means emits the guidance light by sequentially moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player launches the game medium (for example, FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). A portion in which each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in 33).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, by turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, a large right-handed promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a portion for lighting the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes the large right-handed promotion effect while being lit in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to right-handed.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the fade-in and fade-out switching display as the background image switching display performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1)). ~ As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and the fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion effect switches the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round. Continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the big hit round by the switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue to hit right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in −49 (g5), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the small right-handed promotion effect affects the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a big hit will occur in the probable change state after the big hit advantageous state ends. Continued without being done. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the advance notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right-handed promotion effect continue to be displayed without impairing the visibility. You can encourage the player to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2)). As described above, in the case of continuous chan per special figure 2, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first hit. Does not output sound with, or the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by promoting right-handed striking in a manner of frequently emphasizing.

[Modification example of feature section 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the lights before executing the big right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , Not limited to turning off all the lamps, some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the large right-handed promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

(About switching display during big hit round)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are performed. Although it has been illustrated that the switching display of the background image is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, an effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting a BGM (musical piece) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be displayed.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a mode selection screen for selecting the effect mode may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen may be displayed.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big hit round, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the display of the production image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ball state, a whiteout effect of inserting a pure white screen during the reach effect or a blackout effect effect of inserting a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of the pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or it is difficult to see the decorative pattern by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the effect to make it. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the production aiming at V)
In the present embodiment, as a specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is illustrated, and V is aimed at as an effect. As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the production aiming at V, which is the third guidance display using the image display related to a specific area, is not limited to the one that points to the V big winning opening itself, but the one that points to the vicinity of the V big winning opening. It may also point to a route leading to the V-large winning opening, for example, a lid portion for opening and closing the V-large winning opening located on the upstream side of the V-large winning opening.

(About the big right-handed promotion production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-31 (c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed !!" appears. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the character image of "Right-handed !!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. Then, it may be composed of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About advantageous condition)
In the present embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21). ), But it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is a period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, a period shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-47 (f4) (t4 to 10-21 in FIG. 10-20). (Period up to t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the symbol in which the big hit occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About right-handed promotion production in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit per special figure 1, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. It was lit with, but it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of big hit per special figure 1. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the jackpot per special figure 1 is a probabilistic jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output depending on the mode. Further, when the big hit in the special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a sound in the manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. May not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chans per special figure 2)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

Further, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of continuous chan per special figure 2. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the continuous chan hit in Special Figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R change to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. Further, when the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speaker 8L, 8R responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. You may not output the sound with. When the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, unlike the first hit in the special figure 1, the frame lamp has a special mode (for example, gold or seven colors, etc.) according to the large right-handed promotion effect. ), Or the sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner according to the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right-handed promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit in the special figure 1. ..

(About the 3rd guidance display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display relating to the specific area, an image pointing to the V big winning opening during the big hit round in the probability variation big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the jackpot game state ends, or a variable winning ball It may be applied to display an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), a symbol variation specification command (8D system command), and a display result from the CPU 103. Based on the reception of the designated command (8C series command) and the fluctuation pattern designation command (81 series command), "Aim!" With an arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). The character image of "" may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right-handed promotion effect may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost symbol)
In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 7 is illustrated. It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a lost symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time-saving symbol is won, the lottery will not be used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not there is a transition to the time-saving state, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performance other than the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, so that the set value can be changed only if it cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time reduction end symbol lottery (time reduction end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, it always goes through the jackpot gaming state, so that the player is encouraged to hit right in the time-saving state. It was possible to perform the big right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare production that is executed when a big hit occurs. However, when the lost symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure a time for executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect between the time when the symbol is displayed and the time when the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect may be executed by the following methods.

For example, when the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of the lost symbol that is not the time-saving symbol stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the lost symbol that is the time-saving symbol stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. In the meantime, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of control in the time-saving state. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C system command), the CPU 103 is a command for specifying a loss, in addition to a display result specification command indicating a normal loss variation in which a time reduction is not given, a loss variation for a time reduction in which a time reduction is given. A display result designation command indicating the above may be prepared, and the effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 by properly using both commands depending on whether or not the time saving symbol is lost. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds when it receives the display result designation command indicating the normal loss fluctuation, and sets the symbol confirmation time when it receives the display result designation command indicating the loss fluctuation for shortening the time. May be 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, “time saving RUSH”) indicating the name of the time saving state on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound is output in the corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. A part of the time-saving fanfare effect can be made to correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image (for example, "O") congratulating the time saving state even before the name image ("time saving RUSH") produced by the time saving fanfare effect is displayed. The text image of "Medeto !!") is displayed on the image display device 5, the sound for congratulating the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting for congratulating the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to be a mode. In addition, as a small right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right-handed") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The right-handed sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may be changed to a right-handed display (lighting). The image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both are urging the player to hit right for the same period.

After that, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed while the name image (“time-saving RUSH”) produced by the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then FIG. 10-25. After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), a large right-handed strike is promoted during the time-saving fanfare production as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26). You may perform the production. During this time, the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed promotion effect may be continued as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50.

In this way, even when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time longer than the symbol confirmation time of the lost symbol that is not the time reduction symbol, the symbol confirmation time is greatly increased. It is possible to execute a striking promotion effect and a small right-handed striking promotion effect.

In addition, when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, the time reduction is not limited to the one that executes the large right-handed promotion effect or the small right-handed promotion effect by using the symbol confirmation time as described above. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the design is fixed, in the next game (variation), the time saving fanfare effect is executed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right are performed. You may perform a striking promotion effect. Specifically, when the next game (fluctuation) of the game in which the lost pattern is confirmed is the lost fluctuation, the time-saving fanfare production is performed instead of performing the production that expects a hit such as reach production or advance notice production. At the same time, a large right-handed promotion effect or a small right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol is confirmed is a big hit, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so that the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no hold memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare effect is executed while the symbol is not changed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command (9F command) is not transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 so that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed and the time saving fanfare effect is not hindered. .. Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
A light emitting means for notifying that the game medium is launched toward the second flow path is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
Moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). For example), gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, the instruction to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction is emphasized by the first guide display and the second guide display in the predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, and then the first guide display is displayed. By instructing to take over the second guidance display and launch the game ball in a predetermined direction without taking over, it is possible to avoid feeling annoyed by not overemphasizing the instruction, and moreover, the second guidance display is displayed first. And conservatively instruct to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction, then recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after recognizing it, firmly instruct to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction by the first guidance display. In addition, the effect executing means limits the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information that can be specified to be controlled in the special state. , The judgment result information judged after being controlled to the special state is, for example, the judgment result that the special state ends is known in advance by the execution of the look-ahead effect. It is possible to avoid a situation where it is lowered. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the instruction of the direction in which the gaming ball should be launched in an advantageous state when installed in the amusement park is easy to understand and the game interest is not easily deteriorated.

Further, the pre-reading notice and the guidance display may be associated with each other. For example, when displaying a strip-shaped look-ahead notice over a plurality of fluctuations as a look-ahead notice, it may be moved in the left-right direction. In this case, in the case of a gaming state in which the player should aim at the game area on the left side when viewed from the player, it is preferable to move the look-ahead notice band from right to left. By doing so, it is possible to specify the area to be fired from the display mode of the pre-reading notice and provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of preferably executing an instruction to urge the player to launch the gaming ball in a predetermined direction and improving the interest, variable display is performed and variable. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the display result.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). For example), gaming machines. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 11-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 11-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 11-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 11-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern can be changed based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period, which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not motivated, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the players on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko game machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 11-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 11-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 11-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 11-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 11-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 11-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 11-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state and is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion regarding a probability variation state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment is not limited to the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving control is performed (the time saving state is set) even when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result. As for the display result of the special figure game, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time saving state, but in the time saving state, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving control is not newly performed. On the other hand, as for the decorative symbol, different symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol changes, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display. In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbol includes one in which a plurality of LEDs are sequentially lit or blinked, and as a display result, a predetermined LED lighting combination may be displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display). included.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory. Further, in the time saving state, the control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is executed, and the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved. Then, in the time-saving state, if a so-called right-handed hit is performed to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82, and forms a large winning opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, so-called right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is launched into the game area on the right side, may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12-1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 12-1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S1201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S2101; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

When it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No), or when it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit value (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, for example, the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure hold storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the count value of the number of reserved memory of the second special figure increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, among the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The first hold indicator 25A may be made to perform such a display (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. do.

The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number of them is It stores until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process of determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S1215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S1216), the process proceeds to step S1204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of FIG. 12-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" or a "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S1209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will hold the display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 first, for example, a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when in the time saving state) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probabilistic flag (the flag that turns on when the probabilistic state is in effect), the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S351). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S352). When it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S353). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S353; Yes), or when it is determined that the big hit is in the process of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S354). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S356).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S353 (step S353; No), the CPU 103 is the third. The special figure display result is determined from the 1 special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table according to the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current gaming state. A table for determining the figure display result is selected (step S355).

Following the process of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 12-2 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). can.

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S1210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-11) prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the table to be used (step 12-11). S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S360). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 12-11 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S362). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not within the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined time saving determination range (step). 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Therefore, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the time saving determination range. Although the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" is "loss", it is a variable display result in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time reduction control is performed from the variable display performed after the stop display is performed. show.

When it is determined that the time saving is within the range of the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the time saving type determination table data from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 12-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the time saving type is determined by referring to the selected time saving type determination table data.

Following the process of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 prepares a table for determining the loss variation pattern at the time of turning on the time saving start flag, which will be described later, prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIGS. 12-12 (A) and 12 (D)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002A). The time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed although the variable display result is "missing", and the random number value MR3 is used for each fluctuation pattern. The decision value to be compared with is assigned. In step 059AKS002A, one of the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (A) and the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (D) is selected according to the time saving type. do it.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving is not within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIG. 12-12 (FIG. 12-12). B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 is set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S1209. Refer to any of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on, and loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off, and set the determination value to match the random number MR3. The assigned fluctuation pattern is determined (step S363). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination results of step S358, step 059AKS002, and step S363 (step S364), and the winning time disorder. The numerical judgment process is terminated. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start port buffer value is "1", the first start port prize designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start win commands. Set the command and send. When the start port buffer value is "2", the second start port prize designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as the start win prize command. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure hold storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure hold storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure hold storage number and 2nd special figure hold storage number (to the storage number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the designated special figure hold storage number may be specified by the count value of the first special figure hold storage number counter or the second special figure hold storage number counter. When the determination result in step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (to "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S357 is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("small hit"). A command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". When the command is specified (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "loss (time reduction)") and the determination result of step 059AKS001 is not within the time reduction determination range (step S360; No), the determination result of the variable display result is "loss". It is a command to specify that there is (a command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), the determination at the start winning is performed. It may be a command that specifies that it is "no judgment" (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying a variation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is When the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") that specifies that the judgment at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no judgment". do it.

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not there is a "hit" or "loss (time reduction)" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 12-10) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S354 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S352 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S353. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process such as step S355, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S1231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S1235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage count value stored by the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S1235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S1231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicated by the random number values MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either of the processes of steps S1234 and S1238, the table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing" is changed. The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S1239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) is set in the used table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) is set in the table to be used. Further, the CPU 103 may select the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table, a random number value for determining the special figure display result is determined according to whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with MR1 are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result has the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the decision data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the time saving state from the next variable display as "loss (time saving)". In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is in the probability change state (high probability state), it is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, it is a big hit as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high. In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table sets the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" from the next variable display. The decision data is assigned so that the probability of being decided to control the time saving state is high. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the ratio of the special figure display result being "missing (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be made different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability change Frequent small hit game states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (high accuracy and high base state). By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". .. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, even if the ratio determined to control the small hit game state is lower in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability change state than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probability change state without time reduction. good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table.

Following the process of step S1239 shown in FIG. 12-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is subjected to "big hit", "small hit", and "loss (loss). Compared with the decision value assigned to each special figure display result of "time reduction)" and "loss", the special figure display result is either "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)" or "loss". (Step S1240).

Since the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S1239, in the process of step S1240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is in a probable change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" is determined by using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the case of the time saving state is usually selected as the determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state is the probability change state in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case of is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this.

After determining the special figure display result in step S1240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S1241). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (step S1241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-6 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). There are multiple types of numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, such as "non-probability variation", "probability variation", and "probability", depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to the jackpot type of.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determination value for the jackpot type of "probability" is different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (the value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while the variable special figure. When is the second special figure, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable" can be made different. In particular, in a special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" as compared with the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 12-4, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 stored in the variable random number buffer can be changed to “non-probability”. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "probability change" and "probability" is matched (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probability variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "probability", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S1246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" (hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "time reduction"). It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS003). Then, when it is determined to be "time saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type shown in FIG. 12-7 as a table to be used for determining the time saving type to any of a plurality of types. The table is selected and set, and the time saving type is determined based on the random number value MR2 in the same manner as in the case of determining the jackpot type (step 059AKS004).

The time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 12-7 is based on MR2, which is common with the random number value for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the time saving state as "loss (time saving)". It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type to one of a plurality of types. In the time saving type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time saving type is a plurality of types of big hit types such as "time saving A" to "time saving D". Is assigned to. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure, "time saving A" or "time saving B" When the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the second special figure, it is determined to be the time saving type of "time saving C" or "time saving D". "Time saving A" and "time saving C" are time saving types that are controlled to the time saving state while the special figure game is played 100 times. "Time saving B" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 50 times. The "time saving D" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 20 times.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 of FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 corresponds to the time saving type determined in the step 059AKS004, for example, the time saving type buffer value which is the storage value of the time saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", the time saving type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "time saving B", it is set to "1", if it is "time saving C", it is set to "2", and "time saving D". If it is, it may be set to "3".

After executing the process of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time saving medium flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as a time saving flag). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006A). The time saving start flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is started from the next special figure game.

When it is determined in step 059AKS003 that it is not "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS003; No), or when it is determined in step 059AKS006 that the time reduction medium flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), step After executing any of the processes of S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, the result of pre-determination of whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and whether or not to control the next time reduction state, and further, the big hit. A definite special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state and the determination result of the time saving type in the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is not "missing (time reduction)", the lost symbol corresponds to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "missing". The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol that becomes is set as the finalized special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)", the time reduction symbols "1" and " Any one of the special symbols indicating the numbers 4 ”,“ 6 ”, and“ 8 ”is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving A". Further, according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", the special symbol indicating the number "4" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving C", the special symbol indicating the number "6" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving D", the special symbol indicating the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol.

When it is determined in step S1246 that the special figure display result is "small hit", the small hit symbol is set in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number 2 ”is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, when it is determined in step S1241 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the big hit symbols are "3", "5", and "7" according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S1244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers of "" is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the special symbol showing the number "3", which is the normal jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "7", which is the probability variation jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number "5", which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the decision result of setting the jackpot type to "probability".

After the finalized special symbol is set in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .. If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S1250), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 12-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-11 (A), and the jackpot display result is "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). .. Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. In the feature unit 059AK, a dedicated variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) or a variable display, which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", is selected. Although it encourages the result to be "missing (time saving)", there is a variation pattern of time saving that is "missing". Regarding the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time of loss (time reduction), which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D. There may be a variation pattern of the type of super reach effect that is executed only when.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The big hit fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-11 (A) changes the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is set to "big hit". It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-11 (A), a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability”, “probability”, or “probability”. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-3, and the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. Is assigned to a crab.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12-11 (A), the determination value varies depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined, so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different. There is a part assigned to the pattern. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the determination values for the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3 The allocation is different. As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined for the same fluctuation pattern different depending on the determination result of which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is used.

Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a part in which determination values are assigned to different fluctuation patterns depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", a determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3. On the other hand, no determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability", the determination value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PB4. No decision value is assigned to -1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to "probability", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

When the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probabilistic state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the assignment of the determined value for each fluctuation pattern may be different. As a result, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of game states is used. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the determined value may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. Thereby, different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on which of the plurality of types of game states. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach than in the case of "probability variation". .. Therefore, when the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot type will be "probable change" rather than "non-probable change", so that the player can have expectations and the game. You can improve your interest. Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-11 (A), the variation pattern PB4-2 that performs the reach effect of the super reach B is more than the variation pattern PB4-1 that performs the reach effect of the super reach C. , The fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that produces the reach of Super Reach A is more assigned than the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time in FIG. 12-10). Has been done.

Returning to FIG. 12-8, when it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). ). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-11 (B), and the special figure display result is "small hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007). When it is determined that the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table when the time saving start flag is turned on as shown in FIGS. 12-12 (A), (C) and (D). (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving start flag is off (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIGS. 12-12 (B) and (E) (step). 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, depending on the type of the special figure and whether or not the time is shortened. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss (time reduction)” or “loss” is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is performed, FIG. 12- Refer to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 12 (A), and use it as numerical data indicating the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 stored in, for example, the fluctuation random number buffer, depending on the time reduction type. Based on this, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, FIG. 12-12 (C) or (D) depending on whether or not the time reduction control is performed. ) Refers to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the special figure display result is "missing" and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the time saving control can be performed by referring to the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 or the like depending on whether or not the time saving state is being performed. Further, when the special figure display result is "missing" and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the time saving is in progress, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIG. 12-12 (B) is displayed. With reference to it, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 and the like. On the other hand, in the normal state, the variation pattern can be selected from a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is off shown in FIG. 12-12 (E). decide. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the time reduction start flag is on, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the type of super reach is selected. Decision values are assigned so that the time saving types are determined at different rates. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that the person who executes the super reach with a high expectation of big hit is the time reduction type with a large number of time reductions (B is "time reduction A" rather than super reach C). It is assigned so that the ratio of time saving types is high). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the determination value is set to Super Reach A, which has the highest expectation of big hit. Not assigned. That is, in the feature unit 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of “loss (time reduction)” differs depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, when a big hit occurs, or when a loss (time reduction) occurs. Determining values are assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained, such as when the result is simply lost. Therefore, the variation of the production result can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the right side for the player, and the game ball wins only when the so-called right-handed hit is made. ing. Therefore, in the feature unit 059AK, the second special figure fluctuates in the time saving state due to the player hitting the right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure changes in the normal state. That is, the second special figure fluctuates in the normal state only when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (E), the feature unit 059AK corresponds to four times, which is the maximum number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction (maximum value of the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure). It is a variable display (variable) fluctuation pattern determination table (corresponding to "4").

After returning to FIG. 12-8 and executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). When the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 indicates that the determined fluctuation pattern is a time saving fixed fluctuation pattern (that is, a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time saving)) PB2-4. (Step 059AKS012). When the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period as a period for executing the time saving fanning effect described later is added to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the determined fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS013). .. Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a time saving fanning effect period may be added according to the time saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time reduction), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern of time reduction, are shown in the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. )It is included. The time-saving fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the time-saving symbol, which is a decorative symbol indicating that the decorative symbol is controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display, is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 of FIG. 12-8, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12-10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined according to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time saving fanning production period Is the added period. The CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the period in which the time saving fanning effect period is added). Therefore, it is possible to set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the time saving start flag is on and the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period is set as the period for executing the time saving fanning effect. , An example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period is set. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, as in the case of the time saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type may be added, and the processing may be common to step 059AKS013. Specifically, the respective periods corresponding to "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" shown in FIG. 12-9 are added as periods corresponding to "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". do it.

Following the process of step S266, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process.

FIG. 12-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 12-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 is on. (Step S291). Here, the special figure confirmation display in-display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S295, which will be described later, in response to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off in step S291 (step S291; No), a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process for transmitting the decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the symbol.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-14. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern specification command is also a command for designating the variation start of the decorative pattern.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening prize designation command) for designating that the first start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first start winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening prize designation command) for designating that the second start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first starting port winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a starting opening winning designation command.

The command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a loss (time reduction), and the big hit type and the time reduction type, that is, an effect control command (display result) that specifies a variable display result. Specified command). In this embodiment, display result specification commands corresponding to each display result are set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "loss" and "loss (time reduction A") for the time reduction type. "01" for "time saving)", "05" for "big hit" with "probability change" as the jackpot type).

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described later.

The command 8FXX (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation specification command) that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed, and the derived display is displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the decorative pattern. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, whether or not the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the display result corresponding to each time reduction type when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)". The specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "loss (time reduction)", "00" is set for "XX" in the command, and if the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the time reduction type is selected. A unique number is assigned accordingly, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" if the time saving type is "time saving A", "02" if the time saving type is "time saving B", time saving. If the type is "time reduction C", "03", if the time reduction type is "time reduction D", "04", etc.).

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating the game state. In this embodiment, game state designation commands corresponding to each game state are set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high-accuracy low-base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state to notify that the big hit game state has been reached. The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game state.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game state (start of the ending). The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. The command A602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game state.

The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure hold storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure hold storage number. “XX” indicates the number of first special figure reserved storage. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure holding storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure holding storage number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reserved storage number. The first special figure holding storage number designation command and the second special figure holding storage number designation command are collectively referred to as a special figure holding storage number designation command.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. The command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, in the process of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 to 3, the variable display is variable based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random number values MR1 to 3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Whether or not the display result is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the winning random value determination process (see FIG. 12-3) in step S1213. In a predetermined case, this determination may not be performed. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case where there is no judgment) about the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the symbol specification command (for example, if "no judgment", " If it is "00" or "miss", "01" is set, if it is "loss (time reduction)", a unique number is assigned according to the time reduction type, and if it is "big hit", it is unique according to the big hit type. Number is assigned). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case without judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if "no judgment" is used. "00", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

FIG. 12-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 12-13 as the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is a process for setting to transmit a variable display result and a decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. In the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is set in the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS042; Yes), since the variable display result this time is "missing (time saving)", the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. (Step 059AKS043), the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is terminated.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (B), a predetermined decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) is set according to the time saving type. As shown in the figure, the fixed time is 10 seconds for "time saving A" and "time saving B", while the fixing time is 5 seconds for "time saving C" and 2 seconds for "time saving D". The time saving types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are the time saving types determined only when the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)", and are "time saving C" and "time saving". Since the time saving type of "D" is a time saving type that is determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is "missing (time saving)", the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)". Since the fixed time differs depending on whether the variable display result of the second special figure is "miss (time reduction)", the variation of the variable display increases and the game interest can be improved. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "loss (time reduction)", the confirmation period differs depending on the time reduction type, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the confirmation period. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, since the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time reduction state is not obtained, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the time reduction ends is obtained. By performing the process of step 059AKS043 only in the case of "loss (time reduction)", the fixed time according to the time reduction type of "time reduction C" and "time reduction D" shown in the figure is obtained. That is, in the case where the time reduction state is controlled again in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum reserved storage number of the second special figure) (“time reduction”). In "C" and "time reduction D"), as shown in the case, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state ("time reduction A" and "time reduction B"). The confirmation time is shorter than. Therefore, it is necessary to clearly notify the player that the time saving state is controlled, and it is possible to control the time saving state by lengthening the confirmation period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special figure. A period can be provided to clearly notify the player. In addition, in the case where the time is controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction, if the confirmation period is long, the game interest may be deteriorated. Is prevented from decreasing.

When the time saving medium flag is on in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 12-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU103 Sets to transmit the command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) as the decorative symbol stop command (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process.

After returning to FIG. 12-13 and executing the process of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 has a confirmation period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) set in step 059AKS021. (Any of .5 seconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In the process of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process process corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol confirmed display time set in step 059AKS022 elapses. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure confirmation display flag is on.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer for which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes "0" is determined. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than "0", the game control process timer value should be updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just do it. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated to wait until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S297), whether or not the jackpot flag is on is determined. Determine (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value is the transmission command in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the process of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the probability change state, the time reduction state, and the remaining hold period described later (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the probability change flag, the time saving medium flag, and the remaining hold period flag to turn off the state, and the number of time saving times for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game executed in the time saving state. A process such as clearing the counter may be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S303), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit (step S305). Subsequently, a setting is made for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result of "small hit" from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step S307). In addition, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start time processing is executed (step 059AKS025). The details of the time saving start processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS025, or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special figure process flag and initializes the value to "0". (Step S309). After executing any of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the process of step 059AKS027, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches a predetermined time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined as No.

When ending the time saving state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the time saving ending time processing (step 059AKS028). The details of the time-saving end processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS028, or when the time saving state is not terminated in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the remaining hold period is reached (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining hold period may be determined by checking whether or not the flag during the remaining hold period, which will be described later, is set to the ON state. When the remaining hold period is set, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining hold period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop process. .. The details of the remaining hold period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, when it is not the remaining hold period, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process as it is.

FIG. 12-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 12-13 as the process at the start of time reduction. The time saving start time processing is a processing in which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and a setting for performing time saving control is performed from the next variable display. In the time saving start time processing shown in FIG. 12-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the off state (step 059AKS051), and sets the time saving medium flag to the on state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053). The remaining hold period flag is a flag indicating that the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is in progress, and is described in step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 12-17) described later. When all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure that is set to the on state by the process are finished (step 059AKS072 described later), or the first remaining after the time saving is finished. 2 When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the special figure becomes "loss (time reduction)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 12-16 that the flag is off during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 launches a game ball into the game area on the right side of the player. Is set to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing (step 059AKS054), and the time saving start time processing is ended. By transmitting the right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS054 to the effect control board 12, the right-handed instruction display of the embodiment shown in FIG. 12-33 (F) is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 12-16 that the remaining holding period flag is in the on state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining holding period flag to the off state (step 059AKS055). , Clear various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining hold count value and the fluctuation count value after the end of the time reduction, which will be described later, may be cleared to the initial value "0". Like the remaining hold count value, the variation count value after the end of the time reduction may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction state. Although not shown, the variation count value after the end of the time reduction is, for example, in the special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. 6, when the flag is on during the remaining hold period, the variable display is performed each time. It should be +1.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 of FIG. 12-16, the CPU 103 sets to transmit the simple mode right-handed instruction command (step 059AKS057), and ends the time saving start time process. By transmitting the simple mode right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS057 to the effect control board 12, the right-handed instruction of the aspect shown in FIG. 12-35 (O) is performed on the effect control board 12 side. The display is done. The right-handed instruction command in the simplified mode transmitted and set in step 059AKS057 of FIG. 12-16 is different from the right-handed instruction command transmitted and set in the process of step 059AKS054, which is during the remaining hold period. This is because the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Specifically, in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum number of reserved storages in the second special figure), the time reduction state is controlled again, so that step 059AKS057 In the process of, if the right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in the process of step 059AKS054 is transmitted, the player may be troubled. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-handed instruction is transmitted in a simple manner to prevent the player from being bothered and deteriorating the game interest. ..

FIG. 12-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 12-13 as the process at the end of the time saving. The time saving end time processing is a process of ending the time saving control and setting the remaining hold period. Regarding the probabilistic state in which the time reduction / medium flag is on and the probabilistic change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction control is terminated even in the probability change state, and the time reduction control may be terminated based on the determination result that the time reduction control is terminated. When the time reduction control is terminated in this way, the normal state may be obtained by also ending the probability variation control, and for the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit", or further. It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

In the time saving end processing shown in FIG. 12-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving medium flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it may be determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure by checking the hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

When the second special figure is held (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the flag is set to the on state during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure is held (remaining hold). The remaining hold count value is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", "4" is set in the remaining hold number count value, and "4" is set. If it is "3", "3" may be set, if it is "2", "2" may be set, and if it is "1", "1" may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes by setting the fluctuation count value to "0" after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the end of the time reduction is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 12-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. good. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets to send a right-handed erase command for erasing the right-handed instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the time-saving end time process. By transmitting the right-handed erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the effect control board 12, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 12-30 is executed on the effect control board 12 side. , The right-handed instruction display will be deleted.

When it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 12-17 that the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure does not exist (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball to the game area on the left side of the player. A setting is made to send a left-handed instruction command for instructing to return to the so-called left-handed type (step 059AKS067), and the time saving end time processing is ended.

FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 12-13 as the remaining hold period end determination process. The remaining hold period end determination process determines whether or not the remaining hold period has ended, that is, whether or not all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction have ended. It is a process to end the remaining hold period when it ends. In the remaining hold period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variation count value after the end of the time reduction matches the remaining hold number count value set in step 059AKS064 of FIG. 12-17 (step 059AKS071). .. If the variation count value after the end of the time reduction does not match the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining hold period end determination process as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation count value after the end of the time reduction matches the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the flag during the remaining hold period to the off state (step 059AKS072), and various count values. (Step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, the values of the remaining hold count value and the variation count value after the end of the time reduction may be cleared to the initial value "0" as in the process of step 059AKS056. After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 is set to transmit a left-handed instruction command for instructing the player to return to the so-called left-handed shot in which the game ball is launched into the game area on the left side (step 059AKS074). , Ends the remaining hold period end determination process. When the left-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS074 is transmitted to the effect control board 12, left-handed as shown in FIG. 12-34 (N-2) on the effect control board 12. Instructions will be displayed.

FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 12-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-processing of the jackpot opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 6, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", the waiting time at the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the ending effect, is in advance. The specified timer initial value is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). Depending on whether or not it is, it may be determined whether or not the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out (step S322). , Identify whether the jackpot type was "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variation" (step S323).

When it is determined in step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-probability change" (step S323; Yes), a setting is made to start the control for setting the gaming state to the time saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state to the time saving number counter. Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probability change" or "probability change" (step S323; No), a setting is made to start control for setting the gaming state to the probability change state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state.

It should be noted that the setting for controlling the different types of probability change states may be made depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change" or the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change". As an example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and then the special figure display result is displayed. Set so that both probability variation control and time reduction control are continuously performed until a "big hit" is reached. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is set in the same manner as when the time reduction state is controlled. After making the setting, the probability variation control is continuously performed until the next special figure display result becomes "big hit", while the time saving control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). It may be set as follows. Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden probability", if the predetermined time saving medium collision probability flag is on, the setting for starting the time saving control together with the probability change control is made, while the time saving medium collision probability flag is off. If there is, the setting for starting only the probability change control may be made. Here, for the time saving medium sudden probability flag, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 12-13 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is "probable" and the time saving flag is on. It suffices to be set to the on state corresponding to the time saving control being performed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the processing of the feature unit 059AK on the effect control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start opening prize designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start opening prize designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the 2nd start opening prize designation command or the 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (2nd start opening prize designation command, 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 12-21 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data for the number corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number “0”. Is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start opening winning designation commands, the first special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, FIG. 12-21 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. Similar to the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands, the 2nd starting opening winning designation command, the 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start opening winning designation commands, the second special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-20, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

FIG. 12-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the look-ahead notice setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 12-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the effect control commands (starting port winning designation command, winning determination result command, hold storage number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there is a reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By confirming, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of winning a start.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the read-ahead notice setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "the winning determination is being restricted" is specified (step S1303). If the winning judgment result is other than "Limited winning judgment" (step S1303; No), whether or not the production control command transmitted at the time of starting winning includes the first starting opening winning designation command. That is, it is determined whether or not the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

In the case of the first start opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds or holds the variable display result as "big hit" or "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. It is determined whether or not the variable display result is "missing" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored (step 059AKS082). In the process of step 059AKS082, by confirming the contents of the buffer at the time of the first start winning shown in FIG. 12-21 (A), the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)". It suffices to determine whether or not the result is "loss" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored.

When the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)", or the variable display result is "loss" and the hold which is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is not stored (step 059AKS082; No). ), The normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, when either the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" or the hold in which the variable display result is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored (step). 059AKS082; Yes), the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

When it is determined in step 059AKS081 that it is not the first start opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and the time is shortened. The time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in C) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any of the processes of step 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect as the advance notice effect and the execution mode are determined (step S1304).

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (A), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when the hold that becomes "miss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss" and neither of the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction, is stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal hold change determination table, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss, or the variable display result of "small hit". In the case of, if it is a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and it is a fluctuation pattern of time reduction, in other cases, it corresponds to, and when it is executed, it is a big hit than when it is not executed. The decision ratios are assigned as shown in the figure so that the expectation is high and the jackpot expectation is high in the order of "red"> "green"> "blue" when executing. When the normal time hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 12-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time hold change determination table. ..

In the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when either the hold that is "missing (time saving)" or the holding that is the variable display result is "missing" and is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving is stored. In such a case, the change from the normal state to the time saving state (which may be a probable change state) after the end of the variable display executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read-ahead notice target. Therefore, the variable display result and the variation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target. Therefore, in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation is equal to or higher than a certain value (“green” or higher in this example) is restricted. In the illustrated example, the hold display change effect in the "blue" mode can be executed, but it may be performed only without execution. For example, when the variable display result is "missing" in the stored hold and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving, is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified is initially set to "blue". , And after the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gas, the display mode for the hold to be announced (the hold displayed in "blue") is changed to the hold display of "green" or higher. You may change it. Further, the active display may be changed to a mode of "green" or higher. When the restricted hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 12-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the restricted hold change determination table. ..

Further, in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (A) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), when the variable display result becomes "loss (time reduction)". , An example in which the mode is the same as the case of "big hit" is shown, but for example, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss", the time reduction variation. When it is a pattern, there may be a peculiar aspect (for example, "time?"). According to this, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

The time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 12-23 (C) is a table selected when the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning command. As shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, the normal time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (A) and the limited time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) are Unlike this, the determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or when the variable display result is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction is lost. If the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not in progress, the gaming state is in the time saving state (high base control is in progress). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time saving symbol (special figure) is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving control is not newly performed, and further, the time saving control is controlled to the time saving state in the remaining hold by the return effect described later. Since the effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is performed, it is not necessary to execute the hold display change effect foretelling that the time will be shortened. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" or the variable display result is "missing", which is a fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap. If no decision percentage is assigned. When the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 12-22, execution of the hold display change effect according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2. The presence or absence and the execution mode are determined.

Returning to FIG. 12-22, after executing the process of step S1304, or when it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted (step S1303; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination result of step S1304. Is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number corresponding to the new start winning prize (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted, the data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 may be stored.

Following the process of step S1311, the hold display update setting at the time of starting winning is performed (step S1313), and then the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. For example, when the number of 1st special figure hold storage increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR is increased by 1. Add a new first hold display. On the other hand, when the number of the second special figure hold memory increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL is increased by 1. Add a new second hold display. The first hold display and the second hold display added at this time may be any hold display in the mode determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time is being shortened (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, if it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good.

If the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time reduction number to update the time reduction number (step 059AKS086A). The number of time reductions is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 12-30), which will be described later, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or when it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time is not shortened (step 059AKS086; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the left-handed instruction command from the main board 11 side. (Step 059AKS087), and when it is received (Step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed instruction display (see M6 in FIG. 12-34 (N-2)) is performed to instruct the player to hit left (see M6 in FIG. 12-34 (N-2)). Step 059AKS088). The left-handed instruction display may be continued for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example. .. When the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or when the process of step 059AKS088 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 issues a right-handed instruction command or a simplified right-handed right-handed instruction command to the main board 11 side. It is determined whether or not the command was received from (step 059AKS089).

When either of the right-handed instruction command and the simplified right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when the right-handed instruction command is received, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the mode shown in FIG. 12-33 (F) is performed, and when the simplified right-handed instruction command is received, FIG. 12- The right-handed instruction display M3 according to the aspect shown in 35 (O) is performed. In addition, after the right-handed instruction display corresponding to each command is performed in step 059AKS090, other effects are shown in each variable display until the time saving state ends, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (G). The right-handed instruction display may be performed in a manner that does not interfere with the above.

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or when it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simplified right-handed instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it may be determined whether or not the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received.

If either of the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received (step 059AKS090A; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the omission processing (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 12-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. 12-24 as the process at the time of missing. In the missed time processing shown in FIG. 12-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command can be normally received, that is, whether or not the missed command is a display result designation command (step). 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received (step 059AKS093; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing at the time of dropping as it is. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed, and the previous variable display result remains as it is, waiting until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received in accordance with the reception. , The decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, when the missed command is the display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 has the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Is a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, that is, whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of PB2-4 or PB2-5 (step 059AKS094). In the case of a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the fluctuation pattern includes a time saving fanning effect period, the stop symbol setting process described later is performed (step 059AKS095). Ends the processing at the time of dropping. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the display result specification command is missed, if the variation pattern specification command can be normally received, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is generated. If it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving confirmation or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, it is possible to execute the time saving fanning effect by performing the stop symbol setting process described later, but either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command was missed. In that case, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of omission.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the time saving determination or the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap (step 059AKS094; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. It is determined (step 059AKS096), and the processing at the time of dropping is completed. In step 059AKS096, the combination of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command may be determined to be the combination having the lowest advantage for the player. According to this, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies such as a result of actually having a low advantage even though the combination of decorative symbols having a high advantage is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, it cannot be determined on the side of the effect control board 12 whether or not the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 seems to have a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" after executing an effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In this case, for example, a decorative symbol of "???" may be displayed or a predetermined lost symbol may be shaken until the symbol confirmation designation command is received.

Returning to FIG. 12-24, when the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS090A; Yes). It is determined whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) becomes "missing" based on the display result designation command (command stored in the storage area) or the like (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a variation pattern determination result specification command (variation pattern determination) transmitted from the main board 11. The non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1, PA1) corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern specified by the result specification command storage area) is "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. -2) It is determined whether or not it is (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination, which is updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. The fixed decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol setting process (step 059AKS092).

FIG. 12-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of FIG. 12-24. In the stop symbol setting process, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect and the execution setting of the return effect are performed, and when the special symbol display result (variable display result) is "missing (time saving)", the time saving symbol is finally stopped. Processing to make a symbol is performed. In addition, the time-saving symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol is referred to as a time-saving symbol in order to distinguish it from the special symbol.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIGS. 12-26, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special figure based on a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)", or if it is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101; Yes), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the time reduction. Is determined (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, if it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good. When the time is not shortened (step 059AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the lost symbol of the reach combination as the temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature unit 059AK, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction gap, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and then. A time-saving fanning effect is performed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined to be the lost symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the decorative of the reach combination prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is stored. The temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) may be determined by referring to the symbol determination table.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect setting process for setting to execute the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of FIG. 12-26 as the time saving fanning effect setting process. In the time-saving fanning effect setting process shown in FIGS. 12-27, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. As shown in 12-28, the time saving fanning effect pattern is determined (step 059AKS113), and the time saving fanning effect setting process is completed. Although not shown in FIGS. 12-28, if the time-saving fanning effect setting process is executed due to the stop symbol setting process being performed in the missing time process in FIG. 12-25, the time-saving effect setting process is executed. Since the time-saving type is unknown except for the fluctuation pattern of the ghost, it may be determined to be the time-saving fanning effect pattern of the pattern dedicated to the missing time (for example, the effect pattern of "success D" with the effect time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIGS. 12-28, when the time saving types are "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" with an effect time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success B" having an effect time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success C" having an effect time of 1 second is determined. In the case of a variation pattern of the time saving gas, it is determined to be a time saving fanning effect pattern of "failure" with an effect time of 10 seconds. The effect time is a time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period added in step 059AKS013 in FIG. 12-8 (see FIG. 12-9), and the effect control CPU 120 is the display result transmitted from the main board 11. The time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period is determined as the time-saving fanning effect time by the designation command and the variation pattern specification command. In the feature unit 059AK, for example, the same character is displayed because the production time is the same for the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" and the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "failure", and the time-saving symbol is displayed in "success A". Is the success pattern that finally stops and displays, and in "Failure", the time saving symbol does not finally stop and displays, and the decorative symbol of the reach combination stops and displays. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not it succeeds (whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, in the feature unit 059AK, as shown in FIG. 12-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. Similarly, the execution ratio differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. That is, with respect to the reach effect of Super Reach A, which has a high expectation of a big hit, the variable display result does not become "loss (time reduction)", and the time reduction fanning effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap in which the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs.

After returning to FIG. 12-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105). When the special symbol display result is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time reduction symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and stops. The symbol setting process ends. In step 059AKS106, the time saving symbol in the mode corresponding to the time saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIGS. 12-32 (D-1) and 12-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, when the special figure display result is neither "loss (time reduction)" nor "loss" and is not a fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed this time. It is determined whether or not the variable display of is the variable display corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, the time saving end time flag is set to the on state after the time saving number is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0" in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 12-24, and the variable display performed immediately after that is displayed. Whether or not the display is variable corresponding to the second special figure may be determined by whether or not the second symbol variation start designation command has been received.

In the case of variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the second special figure after the end of the time reduction. Executes the return effect setting process to execute the return effect that suggests whether or not the hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the figure. (Step 059AKS108).

FIG. 12-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIG. 12-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIGS. 12-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)". , Of the effect control command reception buffers provided in the RAM 122, the determination is made by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special figure (step 059AKS115).

When there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds the hold corresponding to the second special figure. A return success pattern is set to notify that there is a hold in the memory in which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again due to one of the remaining holds (step 059AKS116). ), Ends the return effect setting process. On the other hand, when there is no hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; No), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A return failure pattern that notifies that there is no hold in the hold memory for which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol will not be stopped and displayed again due to any of the remaining holds. The setting (step 059AKS117) is performed, and the return effect setting process is completed. In the feature unit 059AK, both the return effect of the return success pattern and the return effect of the return failure pattern execute a common effect (an effect of inciting whether or not the time is shortened again), and as a result, a stop display is displayed. The combination of decorative patterns to be made is different.

After returning to FIG. 12-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the return effect pattern set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time saving return symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS110), and the stop symbol setting process is terminated. The time saving return symbol is a symbol different from the time saving symbol determined as the final stop symbol in step 059AKS106 according to the time saving type (see FIG. 12-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, when it is not a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; No), when it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time is being shortened (step 059AKS102; Yes), or when it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)". When it is determined that the display is not (step 059AKS105; No), or when it is determined that the display is not variable corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special figure performed after the time reduction is completed in step 059AKS107 (step 059AKS107; No). ), The effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect, and prepares it by storing it in ROM 121 in advance. The final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the reach combination. In this way, even if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special symbol display result is "loss (time reduction)" in the stop symbol setting process, if the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the decorative symbol The final stop symbol of is a decorative symbol of the reach combination by the processing of step 059AKS111.

After returning to FIG. 12-24 and executing the process of step 059AKS092, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display in addition to the settings in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern. After making settings for executing the effect during variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern such as the effect to be performed or the mini game (step S559), the effect control pattern is one of a plurality of prepared patterns. (Step S560). The effect control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, when it is decided to execute the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect is selected and set as the usage pattern. If it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received in the process when the data is missed, it is not necessary to select the effect control pattern. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed and the previous variable display result remains, but it waits until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. At the same time, the decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received in the missing time processing, the effect control pattern dedicated to the missing time may be selected in the step S560. ..

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 receives, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( The initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, when the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect is made in the time saving fanning effect setting process of step 059AKS104 of FIG. 12-26, it is indicated by the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set by adding the effect time of the time saving effect to the time. After the execution of step S561, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to fluctuate. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 12-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 12-30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801). ). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern in response to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time reduction number display period for displaying the time reduction number (step 059AKS121). ). The time reduction number display period is a period for displaying the time reduction number updated in step 059AKS086A in FIG. 12-24, and may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that the time reduction number display period is reached (step 059AKS121; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the time reduction number display control updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 12-24 as the remaining time reduction number. (Step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or when it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time reduction display period (step 059AKS121; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 059AKS123). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 059AKS123; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or when it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach effect period (step 059AKS123; No), the effect control CPU 120 is at the symbol temporary stop timing which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the reach combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 12-26 (step 059AKS103). When it is determined that the symbol temporary stop timing is reached (step 059AKS125; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol temporary stop display (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative symbol of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103. Display it.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or when it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the symbol temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the time-saving fanning effect period for executing the time-saving fanning effect. Whether or not it is determined (step 059AKS127). The time-saving fanning effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving fanning effect setting process of FIGS. 12-27. When it is determined that the time-saving fanning effect period is in effect (step 059AKS127; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the time-saving fanning effect control for executing the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or when it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not the time saving effect period (step 059AKS126; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the return effect period for executing the return effect. (Step 059AKS129). The return effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return effect setting process of FIGS. 12-29. When it is determined that it is the return effect period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the return effect control for executing the return effect (step 059AKS130).

After executing the process of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return effect period (step 059AKS129; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, control for changing the display mode of the active display and performing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol such as a mini game is performed (step S808), and the effect process during the variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 is normally received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not normally received (step 809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing (time reduction)". (Step 059AKS137). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time reduction number in the time reduction number (step). 059AKS138), after performing the special time reduction notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time reduction number (059AKS139), the variable display during effect processing is terminated. If the symbol confirmation command has not been received normally, the effect itself of notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed. In addition, even if it is received normally, for example, if there is an inconsistency such as the content indicated by the symbol confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result specification command do not match, "? The special time reduction notification control for displaying "?? times" may be performed, or the effect itself for notifying the time reduction number may not be executed.

When the symbol confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the symbol (step S810). After executing the process of step 810, the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation symbol display time according to the received symbol confirmation command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the confirmation time indicated by the commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission in step 059AKS043 shown in FIG. 12-15 or step 059AKS044 may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS131, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the received symbol confirmation command the number of time reductions (FIG. 12-15 (B)). ) Is set (step 059AKS133), and the time reduction number notification control for displaying the time reduction number (notifying the time reduction number) is performed (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or when it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the effect control CPU 120 is right-handed. It is determined whether or not the erase command is received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if it is received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-handed instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or when it is determined in step 059AKS135 that the right-handed erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the value of the effect process flag. It is updated to "3" which is a value corresponding to the processing (step S812), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 12-31 is a timing chart showing each timing during the variable display in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. 12-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which the variable display result is "loss" (including loss (time reduction)). Specifically, FIG. 12-31 (A) shows an example in which a time saving symbol (referred to as “time saving A” as a time saving type) is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 12-31. (B) shows an example in which the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol without executing the time saving fanning effect, and FIGS. 12-31 (C) shows the time saving gasse. An example in the case of a fluctuation pattern is shown. In the illustrated example, in order to facilitate understanding, all of FIGS. 12-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which Super Reach C is executed, and FIGS. B) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 12-31 (C) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. NS. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). Then, a time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L5 shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C) (see FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time saving fanning effect is completed, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the combination of the decorative symbols at 7:07), and the fluctuation changes after the confirmation symbol display period L1 elapses. finish. The confirmed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 12-15 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), if the time-saving fanning effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the reach state is reached when the variable display is started. After that, the reach production of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmation symbol display period L2 elapses, the fluctuation ends. The finalized symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 12-15 (A)), which is the same as the finalized symbol display period L3 shown in FIG. 12-31 (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-31 (C), in the case of the variation pattern of the time saving gap, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). Then, a time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L5 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L4 shown in FIG. 12-31 (A) (see FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time-saving fanning effect is completed, the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmation symbol display period L3 elapses, the fluctuation ends. The finalized symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 12-15 (A)), which is the same as the finalized symbol display period L2 shown in FIG. 12-31 (B).

Next, an example of the operation of the effect when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed or when the time-saving fanning effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-32 to 12-35.

As shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), when the game state is the normal state after the reach effect of the super reach C is executed, the symbol temporary stop timing is shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-1). As shown, the decorative design of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the decorative symbol 5La is "7", the decorative symbol 5Ca is "5", and the decorative symbol 5Ra, respectively. An example is shown in the case where "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a visually recognizable manner as being temporarily stopped while being shaken. Further, the present invention is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and all the decorative symbols may remain swaying. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, since it is determined as No in step 059AKS102 in FIGS. 12-26, the process of step 059AKS111 is performed without the decorative symbol of the reach combination being temporarily stopped and displayed. , As shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-2), the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (in the illustrated example, an example of the special symbol display result of "1" which is the time saving type of the time saving A is shown), while the decorative symbol is displayed. Shows an example when the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-2), after the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the final stop symbol display period.

When the time-saving fanning effect period starts from the state shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-1), the time-saving fanning effect is executed as shown in FIG. 12-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 of "maybe time saving !?" is displayed to indicate whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, for example, two characters battle. Depending on whether or not the player wins, it may be possible to incite whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In FIG. 12-32 (D-1), the variable display result is “loss (time reduction)”, and the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 12-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, and “time reduction A”. An example is shown in the case where the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and the special symbol display result also shows the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A". An example is shown when a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "green" before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the effect, or may change during the reach effect of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 12-15 (A) is received, as the final stop symbol as shown in FIG. 12-32 (D-2). The lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. As the special symbol display result, as shown in the figure, a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” which is a lost symbol is displayed as the special symbol display result. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the finalized symbol display period. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "blue" before the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display mode may be changed immediately after the start of the fanning effect, or may be changed during the reach effect of the super reach. Further, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the active display display mode is changed to, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. The display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the active display is different. The change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (A). Further, unlike the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 (A), the variable display result is different depending on whether the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap. When is "missing (shorter working hours)", the proportion of "green" or "red" display mode may be higher.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 12-30 in the state shown in FIG. 12-32 (D-1), as shown in FIG. 12-33 (E), the time reduction number display as the time reduction number notification control. M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 12-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 100 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. When the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 12-30 is executed, "time reduction ??? times" is displayed as special time reduction notification control, and notification of the time reduction number (time reduction number) is restricted. Just do it. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F01, elapses, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (F), the time is controlled to a shorter time state and a new variable display (hold display) is performed. Variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the hold display HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 12-30, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (F), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 99 times" is displayed. Further, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the aspect shown in FIG. 12-33 (F) is performed.

After that, the variable display is performed a plurality of times in the time saving state. FIG. 12-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In the time saving state, since the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, the variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed, and the hold corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 12-33 (G), four holding memories corresponding to the second special figure are stored, and four holding displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. In addition, an example is shown in which the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. The right-handed instruction display in the mode displayed in FIG. 12-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second and subsequent times are finished in FIG. 12-33 (G). ), It is displayed as a right-handed instruction display M3 in a mode that does not interfere with other effects.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th variation in the time saving state) is completed after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state ends. FIG. 12-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Is shown. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00, and the time saving state ends. When the time saving state ends, the right-handed erase command is received from the main board 11 side, so that the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 12-30 is performed, and right-handed as shown in FIG. 12-33 (H). The instruction display M3 will be erased. In this state, as shown in the figure, four hold storages corresponding to the second special figure are stored, and four hold displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, which are variable corresponding to the hold display HR1. The remaining hold period is the period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4).

Subsequently, when the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the variable display result is "loss" (an example that is not "loss (time reduction)" is also shown). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the special figure display result becomes "miss (time reduction)" in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state. Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 12-5 (A) and (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, although it is in a normal state during the remaining hold period, the left-handed instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the right-handed instruction display and the left-handed instruction display are repeatedly displayed, which confuses the player. It is prevented from letting you. As shown in FIG. 12-34 (N-2), the left-handed instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining hold period.

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special drawing performed after the end of the time reduction, and since the return effect is executed and set in the process of step 059AKS108 in FIGS. 12-26, the return effect is produced. When the period comes, the return effect is executed as shown in FIG. 12-34 (J). In the return effect, for example, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored (variable corresponding to HR2 to HR4 which is the remaining hold). Whether or not the display result is "missing (time reduction)"), that is, an effect suggesting whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed may be executed. In the case of the return success pattern, the predetermined mission is cleared and the time saving return symbol is stopped and displayed, while in the case of the return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure and the time saving return symbol is not displayed as stopped. The combination of decorative symbols constituting the reach may be stopped and displayed as the final stop. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. If the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "missing (time reduction)", it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIGS. 12-26, so that the return effect is not executed, but the return effect is executed. You may try to do it. In this case, the time-saving fanning effect may be executed after the return effect.

When the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored, that is, when the return is a successful pattern, the process of step 059AKS110 in FIGS. 12-26 changes the display to FIG. 12-34 (K-1). As shown, the combination of decorative symbols including the time reduction return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and it is notified that there is a hold in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. Will be done. In this example, the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (more specifically, the time reduction type of "time reduction D") is shown.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (L-1), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the drawing, the time-saving return small symbol M5 that makes it visible that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc has been stopped and displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed during the remaining hold, so that the player can be given a sense of security.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (the time reduction type is "time reduction D"), so that it can be used as a symbol confirmation command. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 12-15 (B), as shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-1), the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of "time saving D" is stopped as the final stop symbol. Is displayed. As for the special figure display result, unlike FIG. 12-32 (D-1), a special symbol indicating the number "8" corresponding to the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as the special figure display result. NS. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the “green” display mode before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 12-30 in the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-1), as shown in FIG. 12-35 (N-1), the time reduction as the time reduction number notification control is performed. The number display M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 12-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 20 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, elapses, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIG. 12-35 (O), the time is controlled to a new state and a new one. Variable display (variable display corresponding to hold display HL3) is started. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 12-30, as shown in FIG. 12-35 (O), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-35 (O) in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 in a simple mode, which is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 12-33 (F), is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is not stored, that is, in the case of the return failure pattern, the processing of step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 12-26 causes FIG. 12-34 (K-2). ), The decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, and the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (L-2), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, unlike FIG. 12-34 (L-1), the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed because it was a return effect of the return failure pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the confirmed symbols specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 are displayed. After 0.5 seconds of the display period, the fluctuation ends and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining hold period ends, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 12-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 12-24 causes "return to left-handed!" As shown in FIG. 12-34 (N-2). Left-handed instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-handed instruction display is performed in the variable display executed next after the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is completed.

FIG. 12-36 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the information output processing performed in the information output processing in step S23 of FIG. In the processing in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 12-36, for example, a processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. I do. When the process in the information output process shown in FIGS. 12-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special figure display result or the normal figure display result as the display signal output process (step S1801). After executing the process of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes the drive signal output process (step S1802) and outputs the drive signals of the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes the external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot is in the middle or the time saving state (the prize is being awarded), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time saving state is in progress, and Various signals such as a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has ended are output.

FIG. 12-37 is a timing chart showing the output timings of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIG. 12-36. Specifically, FIG. 12-37 (A) shows the output timings of various signals when the time saving state is reached due to the end of the jackpot game state, and FIG. 12-37 (B) shows the time saving state due to the time saving symbol stop. The output timings of various signals in the case of

As shown in FIG. 12-37 (A), when the time is shortened due to the end of the jackpot game state, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the jackpot symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the jackpot signal 3 is output because the time is shortened at that timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when the symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output again without ending the time saving state, the jackpot signal 1 is output and the jackpot signal 3 is output. Stops output. Since it is a big hit in the time saving state, the output of the big hit signal 2 is continued as shown in the figure. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the jackpot signal 3 is output because the time is shortened at that timing. After that, with the passage of time, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, first, the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when a symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output without ending the time saving state, a jackpot is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. At the same time as the signal 1 is output, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the time is shortened again at that timing, so that the jackpot signal 3 is output. As shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, with the passage of time, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation and prevent confusion, and the external device is suitable for a time saving state or continuous operation. The state of the villa can be identified. After that, when the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time reduction)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time reduction state, and the special figure display result. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display), while the time reduction. When it is in the state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time reduction)" is not performed (the new time reduction control is not performed). Further, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 12-26 in the normal state when "loss (time reduction)" is derived and displayed as the special figure display result. On the other hand, when the time is shortened, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIGS. 12-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (B-2) and (D-1), there is a "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. The special figure display result of is a common display result (a special figure display result indicating the number "1" corresponding to the time saving type of "time saving A"), while the variable display result of the decorative symbol is in the game state. In the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 12-26, while in the time saving state, the reach is reached in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 12-26. The final stop symbol that composes the combination is displayed as a stop. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIG. 12-26, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect for inciting whether or not the time saving symbol indicating that the time saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time saving state from the next variable display is stopped is set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is in the normal state, and does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the game state is in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of the time saving state (special state), the time saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, when the "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the CPU 103 is in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 12-15, in the process of step 059AKS043. While the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 12-15 (B) is transmitted, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time set to 0.5 seconds is transmitted. That is, when "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the variable display result is displayed and confirmed depending on whether it is in the normal state or the special state. Time (fixed time) is different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time reduction)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time saving state. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the display result, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display). , In the time saving state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (the new time saving control is not performed). Then, as shown in FIG. 12-5, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table "misses (misses) the special figure display result. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the time reduction state from the next variable display as "time reduction)" is high. Further, the effect control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not the hold of "loss (time saving)" is stored in the hold stored at the end of the time saving state by the process of step 059AKS108 of FIGS. 12-26. It is possible to execute the production. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can display a right-handed instruction in the process of step 059AKS090 in FIG. 12-24, and until it receives the left-handed instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 12-18, that is, The left-handed instruction display is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are finished. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 12-24 by receiving the left-handed instruction command in the normal state. Then, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 12-18, that is, when all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. The effect control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 12-24 in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed. .. According to this, it is possible to perform a suitable launch notification, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 12-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, right-handed instruction display in a mode corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest.

In the return effect, the effect control CPU 120 stores, for example, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared (HR2 which is a remaining hold). -Whether or not the variable display result corresponding to HR4 is "loss (time reduction)"), that is, whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed. The return effect includes a return effect of the return success pattern and a return effect of the return failure pattern, both of which aim to clear a predetermined mission to determine whether or not the time is shortened again. The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the predetermined mission is cleared as a result of executing the production). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7, when the variable display result of the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)", the CPU 103 determines "time reduction C" or "time reduction D" as the time reduction type. Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 12-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines as a time-saving fanning effect pattern that executes a time-saving fanning effect of different patterns according to the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 12-28. That is, the time-saving fanning effect executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state becomes "loss (time reduction)" and the variable display result corresponding to the second special figure on hold are "loss". (Time saving) ”is executed, and a different pattern of time saving fanning effect is executed. According to this, since different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed erase command in the variable display of the time saving end time by the process of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 12-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the time saving end time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the right-handed instruction display by the process of step 059AKS136 in FIG. 12-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display is erased during the remaining hold period. Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 12-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the said in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform a suitable launch notification, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 has a big hit signal 1 indicating that it is in a big hit, a big hit signal 2 indicating that it is in a big hit or a time saving state (being in a special prize), and a time saving by the process of step S1803 of FIG. 12-36. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the machine is in a state and a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has been completed can be output to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and a big hit signal is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. Is output. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped. Stop. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation is selected. The decision value is not assigned, and the decision value is assigned so that the rate of "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach to be executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 12-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the said in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, when it becomes a big hit, when it becomes a loss (time reduction), or when it simply becomes a loss. The determined values are assigned so as to obtain a plurality of variable display results. According to this, the variation of the production result is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is such that the reach effect of the super reach B is performed by the received variation pattern specification command, and even if it is determined as No in step S552 of FIG. 12-24, the display is displayed. Based on the result designation command, whether or not to execute the processes of step 059AKS104 and step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether the judgment is Yes or No in 059AKS101 of FIG. 12-26. That is, even when a variation pattern command of common effect contents such as executing the reach effect of super reach B or super reach C is received, a different effect is executed depending on the content of the display result designation command. According to this, the variation of the production result is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 12-26, the execution setting of the time-saving fanning effect (special effect) that fuels whether or not the time-saving symbol indicating that the time-saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display is stopped and displayed. By performing the above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect after executing the reach effect common to the case where the time-saving fanning effect is executed and the case where the time-saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, since the special production is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-12, since the ratio of the variable display result to "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the time reduction fanning effect is also executed in the same manner. The execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect to be performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap in which the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the rate at which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed differs depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes, even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. Change the display mode of the active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. Even if the contents of the received display result specification command are different, the effect control CPU 120 can display the special figure display result (variable) if the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that performs the reach effect of Super Reach B. Regardless of the display result), the common reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. According to this, the effect can be preferably executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7, the number of time reductions controlled in the time reduction state differs depending on the time reduction type, and as shown in FIG. 12-12, the super reach effect executed according to the time reduction type. The proportions are different. Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-28, the pattern of the time saving fanning effect to be executed is different depending on the time saving type. According to this, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits the display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 12-8, and sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 12-15. The effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the effect based on the content of the received display result specification command in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 12-26, and receives the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 12-30. Set the number of time reductions specified by. According to this, the effect control can be preferably performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 12-24, thereby transmitting the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command. When it is judged whether or not it can be received normally, and when it cannot be received normally, when the missing time processing shown in FIG. 12-25 is executed and either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed. , It is prohibited to perform a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of missing. According to this, it is possible to appropriately perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 could not be normally received in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 12-24, the variation pattern specification command can be normally received and is specified by the variation pattern specification command. When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for determining the time reduction or a fluctuation pattern for the time reduction, the stop symbol setting process is executed in step 059AKS095 of FIG. 12-25 to execute an effect related to the time reduction state such as a time reduction fanning effect. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to appropriately perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of time reductions by the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 12-30. Then, when the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, the time saving number notification is executed by performing the special time saving number notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time saving number in the process of step 059AKS139. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to appropriately perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold display change effect in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIGS. 12-22. Then, in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is a hold that becomes a "big hit", a hold that becomes a "loss (time reduction)", or a hold that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) is selected, and the hold display change effect is executed. That is, when a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored, the hold is "loss (time reduction)", or the fluctuation pattern is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the hold in which the display result is "big hit" is stored, as in the case where the hold in which the variable display result is "miss (shorter time)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, FIG. Select the hold change determination table at the time of restriction shown in -23 (B) to restrict the execution of the hold display change effect. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored, the hold is "loss (time reduction)", or the fluctuation pattern is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is "missing" and the holding of the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern is "time saving" is stored, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the production related to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change effect when the hold display change effect is restricted, or even if the hold display change effect is executed, the hold display change of the display mode of "blue" is changed. Perform the production. That is, the hold display change effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than the display mode of "green" is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute a hold display change effect of a type that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red" when the hold display change effect is restricted. .. According to this, since the execution of a specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation.

(Modification example of feature part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-5, an example is shown in which the time saving symbol as a special figure display result is a part of "loss", but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-38, a part of the small hit symbol may be a time saving symbol. In this case, the time saving control may be performed after the end of the small hit game state, and the right-handed instruction display or the like may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small hit game state. Further, as in the above embodiment, even when the small hit symbol which is the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again in the special drawing game in the time saving state, the time saving state is not newly controlled, and the effect control CPU 120 is used. Instead of the small hit symbol including the time saving symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the small hit may be simply stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining hold are completed, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 12-18, and the remaining hold is performed by the effect control CPU 120. An example of performing a left-handed instruction display in the first variable display performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the above is shown. There may be a second aspect that is inconspicuous to the player, and the left-handed instruction display of the second aspect may be performed in the first variable display that is performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold. The left-handed instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example, from the second aspect with the lapse of time. It may change to the first aspect. Further, the left-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include voice, lighting of a lamp, and the like (that is, left-handed notification for notifying left-handed). Then, for example, in the first aspect, the other output sound is erased and the sound for notifying the left-handed is output, while in the second aspect, the sound for notifying the left-handed is output without erasing the other output sound. do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the return effect is performed when the variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction is performed, but this is an example. Is. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the time reduction. , Any of the timings of the 1st to 3rd variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the pattern is switched to the return success pattern, and after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the return effect of the return success pattern is performed in the next variable display. The return effect may be executed a plurality of times until a success pattern is reached over the display.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect executed according to the time saving type is different, that is, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time saving)" (time saving of time saving C or D). An example is shown in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect is different depending on the type and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). This is an example. There are cases where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" and cases where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". , The pattern of the time-saving fanning effect may be common.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), or in the normal state. An example in which the time (confirmation time) from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction A or B). Is shown, but this is just an example. When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". The fixed time may be the same depending on the case (time saving type A or B). According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the fixed time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" is the same as the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state. It may be time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state will be achieved.

In addition, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". (Fig. 12-35 (N-1), Fig. 12-33 (E)), for example, shows an example (FIG. 12-35 (N-1), FIG. However, these may be in different modes.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the right-handed instruction display is deleted after the end of the time saving state and the right-handed instruction display is not performed during the remaining hold period, but this is an example. The right-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, but may include voice, lighting of a lamp, etc. (that is, it may be a right-handed notification that notifies right-handed), and an image is displayed during the remaining hold period. The right-handed lamp indicating right-handedness may be turned on without displaying and outputting the sound in the device 5.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the loss symbol stop is output, and the symbol confirmation is performed. Since the time saving state ends at the timing when the signal output is stopped, an example is shown in which the output with the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the timing, but this is an example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time reduction has a high ratio of "missing (time reduction)", it remains even when the time reduction state ends. The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold is completed. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a time-saving fanning effect is performed after the reach effect of the super reach, and it is suggested whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped, but this is an example. For example, as a result of the reach effect, the results of big hit (including small hit), time saving symbol stop, and loss may be displayed. According to this, the variation of the execution result of the reach effect is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", an example of adding the time reduction fanning effect period to the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, the "revival jackpot" is variable. A display result is provided, the same fluctuation pattern as when the variable display result is "missing (shorter time)" can be selected, the revival effect period to be executed after the reach effect is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a big hit is configured after the revival effect. The symbol (special symbol and corresponding decorative symbol) to be displayed may be stopped and displayed. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, when the variable display result is "Resurrection jackpot", the process of adding the revival effect period may be executed after step S262 in FIG. 12-8, and the variation of the effect can be increased by a simple process. can.

In the above-described embodiment, after the effect of inciting whether or not the variable display result is a big hit is performed by the reach effect of the super reach, the effect of inciting whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is performed by the time-saving fanning effect. In addition to this, for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous than the time saving. May be notified. According to this, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the symbol confirmation command is not normally received in steps S809 and 059AKS137 of FIG. 12-30, and the special symbol display result (variable display result) is the symbol in "loss (time reduction)". If it is a confirmation command, an example of limiting the notification of the number of time reductions by performing the special time reduction notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139 is shown. The background image may be changed according to the number of time reductions so that the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent even when the special time reduction notification control is performed. Specifically, the background designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the background image specified by the received background designation command is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. do it. According to this, since the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent from the background image, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 side sends a time reduction number designation command indicating the remaining time reduction number, and the effect control board 12 side sends the remaining time reduction number according to the time reduction number designation command. The number of times may be notified. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest. Further, for example, when the number of time reductions is 100, a special fluctuation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side at the timing when the remaining 50 times are reached. On the side, the remaining 50 times of time saving notification may be performed according to the reception of the special fluctuation pattern. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 12-22, "loss (time reduction)", or "loss". When the hold of the change pattern whose change pattern is "time saving" is stored, an example of selecting the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) and executing the hold display change effect, that is, , When a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, or when a hold whose variable display result is "big hit" is stored, FIG. 12- An example is shown in which the common limited time hold change determination table shown in 23 (B) is selected and the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted, but this is an example. The hold that the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" is stored in the hold storage that is currently stored, and the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" is stored. The execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted by selecting the hold change determination table at the time of restriction. For example, on the one hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change effect may be executed, and on the other hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the dialogue notice may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a kind of production with a low degree of expectation. In addition, if a hold that causes the variable display result to be "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the hold display change effect is not executed and the variable display result becomes a "big hit". When the hold is stored, it may be determined whether or not the hold change effect is executed based on the hold change determination table which does not have the display mode of "green" or more shown in FIG. 12-23 (B).

Further, in the above embodiment, a hold in which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. When the hold of the change pattern of "Loss" and the change pattern of "Time saving" is stored, select the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), and expect the degree of expectation to be "green" or higher. An example is shown in which the hold display change effect is not executed, but this is an example. For example, in addition to the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect, multiple types of look-ahead notice effects such as dialogue notice and look-ahead zone notice can be executed, and if Yes is determined in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 12-22, the look-ahead notice effect is executed. The look-ahead notice effect of the zone notice type may not be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted from the hold stored before the read-ahead notice target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbols are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-". An example represented by a lighting pattern or the like is shown, but this is an example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of eight LEDs, for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-39, and the special symbol is represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. May be good. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", it is represented by lighting of three of the eight LEDs, and the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". In the case of "" and "missing", it may be represented by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-1), “time saving D” is performed at the central portion of the image display device 5. An example is shown in which the time-saving symbol 5Cb of the time-saving type is displayed as a final stop symbol, and this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-40, after the state shown in FIG. 12-40 (L-1) (similar to FIG. 12-34 (L-1)), the time saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed. Since the time-saving return small symbol M5 to be visible is displayed and it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (M-3), the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display of the above may be reduced and displayed (referred to as a reduced symbol M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, the game can be sharpened and the game can be improved. Since it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining hold period. In addition to not executing, the restriction may include executing in a mode with low expectation, or executing in an inconspicuous manner such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 059AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Controlling from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether it is in the normal state or the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS092). Execute, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is variably displayed, and the identification information for production is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure and the decorative pattern. Variable display, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, FIGS. 12-32 (B-2)) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is common to the case where the game state is the normal state and the case where the game state is the time reduction state (D-1). (Special figure display result indicating the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A")), the identification information for the effect different between the normal state and the special state. (For example, regarding the variable display result of the decorative symbol, when the game state is the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 12-26, while the time saving is shortened. In the state, in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 12-26, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the normal state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting that the special display result is displayed as the variable display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is No. in step 059AKS102. If it is determined that, the process of step 059AKS104 can be executed, etc.), if it is in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined that Yes in step 059AKS102, the process of step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different between the normal state and the special state (for example, the normal state). If so, while the decorative symbol stop command for the fixed time shown in FIG. 12-15 (B) is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS043, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the fixed time is set to 0.5 seconds. (Send a command to stop the decorative pattern, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 060AK)
The feature unit 059AK includes the following feature unit 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 060AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Controlling from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
As the variable display, the first identification information and the second identification information are variably displayed, and the effect identification information is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display result of the second identification information has a higher ratio of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special). In the figure display result determination table, the probability that the second special figure display result determination table is determined to control the special figure display result from the next variable display to the time reduction state as "loss (time reduction)" is higher. , Decision data is assigned, etc.),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information about the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes the information that the variable display result becomes the special display result (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
The second identification information stored at the end of the special state by notifying that the game medium should be launched to a specific path in the game area during control to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS090). The information related to the variable display of is stored at the end of the special state depending on whether the variable display result includes the information that becomes the special display result or the information that becomes the special display result. Until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the normal route different from the specific route is not performed (for example, right in the process of step 059AKS090). The hitting instruction display is possible, and until the left hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are finished. Do not display left-handed instructions, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
Notifying that the game medium should be launched to the normal path in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088) is performed.
In the variable display of the first identification information, which is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed, the game medium to the normal route. (In the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed, the left-handed instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088, etc.).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route performed during control in the special state. The mode is different (for example, right-handed instruction display of the mode according to the command received in step 059AKS090 is performed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The effect executing means includes a case where the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information in which the variable display result becomes the special display result, and the special display. In the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, different effects are obtained after the common effect is executed, depending on whether the resulting information is included. (For example, the return effect includes a return effect of a return success pattern and a return effect of a return failure pattern, and both perform a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a predetermined mission). However, as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the specified mission is cleared),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. The effect when the special display result is controlled as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is different from that when the special display result is controlled (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-28). The pattern of the time saving fanning effect that is executed depends on the time saving type, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The case where the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and the case where the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. The display time of the special display result is the same as when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display (for example, the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time reduction)). (Time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "missing (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). Time is common, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is not performed (for example, the process of step 059AKS136). Etc.),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is given (for example, the process of step 059AKS090 is executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state, and
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3),
A fourth signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a symbol confirmation signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of the variable display is provided.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means and the third signal is output by the third signal output means at the end of the variable display. Output (for example, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and the timing at which the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped is stopped. (For example, a big hit signal is output),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state, and
A third signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state is provided.
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (time reduction). Even when the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above.
The output of the second signal and the third signal are stopped at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are the same. Stop at the timing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 061AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
When the state control means displays a special display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result as the variable display result in the normal state, the special display result. Based on this, the normal state is controlled to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed).
The effect executing means is
Depending on whether the variable display result is the specific display result or the special display result, a plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed (for example, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed).
The ratio of the special display result differs depending on which type of the specific effect is executed among the plurality of types of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, “” depending on the type of super reach. The rate of "loss (shorter working hours)" is different, etc.),
While controlling to the special state, the game medium should be notified to be launched to the specific route in the game area, and the game medium should be launched to the specific route in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed. Start the notification (for example, display a right-handed instruction in a mode corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is common to the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result and the predetermined display result different from the special display result. Multiple types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, if a big hit occurs, a loss (time reduction) occurs. In the case of a simple loss, the decision value is assigned so that multiple variable display results are obtained, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the variation of the production result is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for production is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
The variable display of the effect identification information is variably displayed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the processes of steps S171 and S172 are executed).
When the effect executing means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect executing means executes a different effect depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, when it is determined as No in step S552). Even so, different effects are executed depending on whether the command is determined to be Yes or No by 059AKS101).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the variation of the production result is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained (for example, after executing the reach effect of super reach, the time-saving fanning effect can be executed. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed, the game entertainment can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained, and whether or not the special effect is executed differs depending on the type of the specific effect (for example,). Depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and when the special effect is executed depending on the type of the specific effect, the effect is described. The ratio of the special display result is different (for example, the ratio of the time saving fanning effect being executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the ratio of the time saving symbol being stopped and displayed as the execution result of the time saving fanning effect is also different. Different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the active display).
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the ratio of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes to, the same type of supermarket Even in the reach production of reach, the rate at which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and executes an effect of notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect. It is possible (for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage is higher than the time saving, such as whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). ,
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for production is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable display time of step 059AKS013). Perform processing, etc.),
In the variable display of the effect identification information, the variable display time of the effect identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, effect control). CPU 120 executes the process of step S561),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the effect executing means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result specification command is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
The effect executing means can execute different types of effects depending on the type of the special display result in the variable display that is the special display result (for example, "time reduction B" rather than the time reduction type of "time reduction A". The execution rate of Super Reach C is higher in the time-saving type, and the pattern of the time-saving fanning effect executed according to the time-saving type is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). In step S268, the display result specification command is transmitted, and in step 059AKS021, the transmission setting of the decorative symbol stop command is performed, such as CPU103).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. (For example, the effect corresponding to the content of the display result specification command is executed, and the number of time reductions specified by the received symbol confirmation command is set in step 059AKS133, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect control can be preferably performed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means executes the effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and either the variable display result command or the variable display pattern command. If one of them cannot be received normally, the execution of the effect related to the special state is restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above.
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means is
An effect is executed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, the process of step S171 is executed).
When the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result cannot be normally received, the effect related to the special state can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. Yes (for example, the process of step 059AKS095 can be executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results.
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). In step S268, the display result specification command is transmitted, and in step 059AKS021, the transmission setting of the decorative symbol stop command is performed, such as CPU103).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. If the second command cannot be received normally, the notification of the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS139).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(Explanation of means relating to feature part 062AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 062AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted ( For example, if a hold whose variable display result is a "big hit" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082),
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the special state is controlled is executed, the newly received determination result information is added to the newly received determination result information. Further restricting the execution of the pre-reading effect (for example, if a hold for executing the time-saving fanning effect is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082).
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game when the production related to the state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
While the pre-reading effect is restricted, the effect executing means does not execute the pre-reading effect in an aspect indicating that the advantage controlled in the advantageous state is equal to or higher than the specific advantage (for example, FIG. 12-23 (B)). (For example, do not execute the hold display change effect above "green" as shown in),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead effect while the look-ahead effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, “green” or “green” or “ Do not execute the type of hold display change effect that changes to a display mode such as "red"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the execution of a specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving a useless expectation to the player.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 063AK according to this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and a right side side of the top side of the image display device 5. The right game area 063AK2 is provided. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails. When the game ball (game medium) launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce to 063AK2. Further, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the game ball is guided to the left game area 063AK1. And it becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The left game area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning opening 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can win a prize by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins (enters) the general prize opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening in which the game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball wins in the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out, and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special figure game, can be satisfied. .. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 13-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for a special electric accessory). The large winning opening door 063AK3 has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win (second state). ing. FIG. 13-2 shows a state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 is in a closed state of the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is off, the big winning door 063AK3 closes the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball wins the big winning door 063AK4. Impossible or difficult to win. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door 063AK3 opens the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball can easily win the big winning door 063AK4. It becomes. When a game ball wins in the large prize opening 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball wins in, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening 10.

In the big winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, the big hit symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed (stop display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". , When controlled to the jackpot game state (advantageous state), it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) and the timing until the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment). , Whichever comes first. One cycle in which the large winning opening 063AK4 is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times in the present embodiment) is reached.

Further, in the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, a small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "small hit". , When controlled to the small hit game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small hit game state, the open state for 0.1 seconds and the closed state for 1.0 seconds are repeated. The operation of repeatedly opening and closing the large winning opening 063AK4 is also referred to as opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated up to a predetermined upper limit opening number of times (10 times in this embodiment) for 0.1 seconds, or a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls is placed in the large winning opening 063AK4 (this embodiment). Then, it ends when one of the conditions is satisfied among the winning up to 10).

In the feature unit 063AK, the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter, referred to as “left-handed”) in which the left game area 063AK1 launches a game ball in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). A game method in which a game ball is launched into the right game area 063AK2 in a short time state (low accuracy and high base state) while aiming to win a prize in the general winning opening 10 or the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (a gaming method). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “right-handed”) to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player is made to hit right to the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. It is configured to aim for a prize.

The feature unit 063AK performs a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to make a right-handed hit during a period in which the right-handed hit is controlled to a time-saving state, a big hit game state, and a small hit game state.

The game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (enters) the large winning opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage port 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a distribution section supply path 063AK8 extending toward the lower left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending toward the lower right are provided.

All the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, only one of the game balls that won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution unit 063AK18 described later through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and the one game. Except for the balls, the balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

13-3 (a) to 13-3 (c) are views showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the feature portion 063AK, as viewed from the arrow I-I in FIG. 13-2. Shows the case. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between the abbreviated rotating piece 063AK10 and the on state and the off state. It is provided with a solenoid 063AK12 for supplying a distribution unit. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting projection 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates about the rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (a), when the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the ON state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Further, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is located at a position lower than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9 (provided below). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage port 063AK7 falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the bending surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. Will be done. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (b), the game ball A2 that has passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1 cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8 due to being blocked by the game ball A1 and proceeds to the right side. Change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. A discharge count switch 063AK16 is provided in the discharge path 063AK9, and a game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled from the on state to the off state while the rotating piece 063AK10 holds the game ball A1, the plunger 063AK11 supplies the distribution unit as shown in FIG. 13-3 (c). Solenoid 063 AK12 pops out from the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and the game ball A1 is repelled toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The repelled game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (a), the game ball A3 flowing down the distribution section supply path 063AK 8 passes through the distribution section pass switch 063AK17, is detected by the distribution section pass switch 063AK17, and then is distributed. Enter the section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8 to guide the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and has a jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area) and a time saving area 063AK20 (special area). ) And the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow the game ball to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21 are provided below the distribution portion 063AK18.

The game ball that has entered the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, and then passes through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path is detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the large winning area 063AK19. Based on this, the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

The game ball that has entered the time saving area 063AK20 passes through the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, is detected by the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, and then passes through the time saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time saving area discharge path is detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4 Based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control for controlling the time saving state (special state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state is performed for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state. Will be played. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4. However, when the time saving area 063AK20 is passed, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. That is, when the time saving state is already controlled, even if the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the period during which the time saving transition control is performed to control the time saving state. It is configured so that the control to extend is not performed.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the large winning opening 063AK4 is won. When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is started when the next variable display is started after the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state and the small hit game state is finished. Is performed, and the time is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. That is, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. .. According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21, so that the game state after the end of the small hit game state It is possible to suppress the possibility that an inconsistency will occur between the control and the production, which will confuse the player and reduce the enjoyment of the game. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

The game ball that has entered the loss area 063AK21 passes through the loss area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the loss area passage switch 063AK24, and then passes through the loss area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the loss area discharge path is detected by the loss area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the loss area 063AK21. In this case, after the end of the small hit game state, the control to change the game state based on the passage is not performed.

The jackpot region light emitting portion 063AK25 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the jackpot region 063AK19. A light emitting portion 063AK26 for a time saving region is provided at an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the time saving region 063AK20. Loss region light emitting units 063AK27 are provided at the upper end and lower end of the loss region 063AK21. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are provided with a light emitting element such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) so as to be capable of emitting light. .. Although the details will be described later, in the feature unit 063AK, an effect of causing the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 to emit light in a predetermined manner is performed. FIG. 13-4 (a) shows a state in which the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 includes a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. The game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time saving area entrance 063AK32, and a loss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 communicates with the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time saving area entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the loss area 063AK21, and the game ball that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the jackpot region entrance 063AK31, the time saving region entrance 063AK32, and the loss region entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage port 063AK34 through which a game ball can pass. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axes shown in FIG. 13-4 (b) are set. The P coordinate axes are set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and is located in the left-right direction between the position P6 as the left end position and the position P3 as the right end position shown in FIG. 13-4 (b). Move back and forth along. FIG. 13-4 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), the game ball A4 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving area entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), the game ball A5 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the left along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot region entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), the game ball A6 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (c). It collides with the right inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the loss region entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 13-6. FIG. 13-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 according to the time passage when the distribution member 063AK28 is performing the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the time of the region through which the game ball passes. The transition according to the progress is shown. The distribution member 063AK28 is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b) when the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at the position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves to the right from the position P0 at a constant speed. It moves to, passes through the position P1 on the right side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), passes through the position P2 on the right side of the position P1 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), and passes through FIG. 13-4 ( It reaches the position P3 shown in b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 for a predetermined right end standby time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P3, passes through the position P2, passes through the position P1, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the right middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 stops at the position P0 over the central standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P0, passes through the position P4 on the left side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b), and is shown in FIG. 13-4 (b). It passes through the position P5 on the left side of the indicated position P4 and reaches the position P6 shown in FIG. 13-4 (b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 to the position P6 may be predetermined as the middle-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end standby time. After that, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the right from the position P6 at a constant speed, passes through the position P5, passes through the position P4, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the left middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 reciprocates in the left-right direction between the position P3 and the position P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is performing an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-6, a game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in response to a change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. However, it also changes whether it passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. Specifically, during the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P2 and the position P3, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. It will be the jackpot area passing period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P1 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P4 have entered the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, the time-saving region passage period is set when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20. During the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P5 and the position P6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to pass through the loss area 063AK21. It will be a period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P1 and P2 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P4 and P5 enter the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, it becomes a passing area uncertain period in which it is not determined whether to enter the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect (small hit) for notifying that the control to the small hit game state is started is performed. The fanfare effect) is feasible, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small hit start effect. As shown in FIG. 13-6, the small hit start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and then the small hit start effect is started. It ends according to the passage of the production time.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit game state, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect. As described above, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is either whether the opening state of 0.1 seconds is repeated up to the predetermined upper limit opening number of times, or whether the game ball wins the large winning opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. It ends when either of the conditions is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-6, in the small hit game state, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution unit is turned on in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. The state is controlled so that the rotating piece 063AK10 can hold the game ball that has entered the distribution unit supply path 063AK8. After the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, it is controlled to the off state according to the elapse of a predetermined game ball holding time. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 repels the held game ball toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the repelled game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. .. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, only one of the game balls winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution unit 063AK18 through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8. Then, except for the one game ball, the ball is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to the ON state in the jackpot game state. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 13-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state and rotates at time t0 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state. The game ball repelled by the piece 063AK10 enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-6, the time t0 when the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

The game ball holding time is set longer than the time required to open and close the large winning opening by a predetermined upper limit opening number in the small hit game state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the large winning opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 13-6, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 13-6) is the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start effect time, and the game ball. Specified by retention time.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start effect time is Depending on the small hit type, it is set to one of a plurality of types of time. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 differs depending on the small hit type.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect time is set to the predetermined first specific time to the third specific time shown in FIG. 13-7 according to the small hit type. Set to one of the times. As shown in FIG. 13-7, the second specific time (for example, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (for example, 11 seconds), and the third specific time (for example, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIG. 13-7, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the special figure confirmation display time elapses after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After the small hit start effect is started, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is finished according to the elapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-7, since the time t1 is included in the loss region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t1 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and is lost. It passes through region 063AK21. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-7, since the time t2 is included in the time saving region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t2 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to shorten the time. It passes through region 063AK20. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-7, since the time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t3 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to make a jackpot. It passes through region 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the large hit area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on which of the first specific time to the third specific time is set for the small hit start effect time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is the large hit area 063AK19. Which of the time saving area 063AK20 and the loss area 063AK21 is passed is different. In the feature unit 063AK, the small hit start effect time is set to any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to the small hit type, so that the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. , The area corresponding to the small hit type among the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 is passed.

The feature unit 063AK is based on the execution of variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small hit variation") in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the display result of the variable display is "small hit" in the special figure game. As shown in FIG. 13-8 (a), as the effects corresponding to the small hit fluctuations, in addition to the above-mentioned right-handed promotion effect and small hit start effect, a time saving suggestion effect, a passing fanning effect, and a passing notification are provided. It is configured to be feasible with directing.

In the present embodiment, as a right-handed promotion effect, an effect of displaying a right-handed promotion image indicating an arrow pointing in the right direction is executed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-handed promotion effect is executed during the period controlled to the time saving state and the big hit gaming state, and is controlled to the small hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 13-8 (a). Performed in a period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a small hit start effect, an effect of displaying a right arrow image and a small hit start image on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction, and is an effect image showing the message "Aim to the right!". The small hit start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7, and also shows the message "Put a ball here!" To encourage the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is an image. As described above, the small hit start effect time elapses after the small hit start effect is started in response to the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and the control to the small hit game state is started. It ends according to what you did.

The time saving suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the time saving state is controlled, and is configured to be feasible during execution of the small hit variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. NS. Correspondingly, in the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite special symbol in the special figure game. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, in the variable display when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, various effects can be executed and the game entertainment can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 13-8 (a), when the normal reach effect, which is the reach effect of the normal reach, the super reach effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach, and the time saving suggestion effect, are executed in the small hit fluctuation, the time is shortened. The suggestion effect is started after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed, and then the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the small hit fluctuation is completed. finish. Hereinafter, the details of the time saving suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-9 (a) and 13-9 (b).

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (a), when the time saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 are started. In the above, the predetermined lost symbol (“767” in the present embodiment) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode different from the case where the derivation display is performed. Next, the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle", and then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right", FIG. The time saving suggestion symbol suggesting that the time saving state shown in -9 (b) is controlled is temporarily stopped and displayed. As for the time saving suggestion symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and it is called "chance" in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols on which a decorative symbol indicating a message is displayed. Returning to FIG. 13-9 (a), after the time saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is executed, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the time saving suggestion effect ends according to the end of the small hit fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 13-8 (a), the passing fanning effect suggests that the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. This is an effect (an effect that suggests passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21). The passing fanning effect is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large prize opening, and then the game ball that has won the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is in the large hit area 063AK19, shortening the time. It ends depending on whether it has passed through either the area 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

The passage notification effect is an effect of notifying which of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed in the small hit game state. In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect is executed as a small hit end effect (small hit ending effect) that notifies that the control to the small hit game state is completed. The passage notification effect is started in response to the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passing through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and then the predetermined passage notification effect time. It ends according to the passage.

In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect time is a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. It is set to any of 1 special time to 3rd special time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, the passage notification effect time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, and the passage notification effect time is such that the game ball loses the time-saving area 063AK21. It is set to the first special time as in the case of passing through. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage notification effect time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passage notification effect time is set to the third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (b), the time saving suggestion effect and the passing fanning occur depending on whether the small hit variation is executed in the normal state or the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state. It is configured so that whether or not the effect and the passage notification effect are executed or the mode of the effect is different.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, while the time saving suggestion effect can be executed. When the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit variation. That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state, It is configured so that different effects can be performed during the execution of the small hit variation.

In the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed, so that the player can know that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that the game can be enjoyed by giving a feeling of expectation that the time saving transition control is performed and the time saving state is controlled.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, in the case of the time saving state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed, so that when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage is performed. Prevents the player from having the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 even though the time saving transition control based on the time saving is not performed. It is configured so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state. By being configured so that different effects can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (b), when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the big winning opening is opened and closed under the control of the small hit gaming state after the small hit fluctuation is completed. At that time, as a passing fanning effect, a normal passing fanning effect (special effect) is executed, which is an effect suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small hit gaming state is controlled to open and close the large winning opening after the small hit variation is completed, the passage of the time saving area 063AK29 is related as a passing fanning effect. Without making any suggestion, a time-saving time-passing fanning effect (specific effect) is executed, which is an effect of suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, the normal passage fanning effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a production to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time saving time passing fanning effect does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, but the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It is a production that suggests passing through.

In the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the small hit fluctuation is completed in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the player is given a normal passing fanning effect. , It is configured to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, and to improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is performed by executing the time saving time passing fanning effect. Expectations from the player that the game ball is controlled in a time-saving state based on the time-saving area 063AK20, even though the control based on the passage is not performed when the ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it can be prevented from giving a feeling and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal passing fanning effect is executed. In the time saving state, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving time passing fanning effect is executed. A suitable effect can be produced according to the state.

In this embodiment, as a normal passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (a), the normal passing fanning image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light, and the normal time passing fanning sound indicating the message "Big hit? Time saving? Loss?" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Perform the production.

The normal time passing fan image AK1 shows the message "big hit" and shows the jackpot area passing fan image AK2 suggesting that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the message "time saving", and the game ball shows the time saving area. It includes a time-saving region passing fanning image AK3 suggesting that it passes through 063AK20, and a losing region passing fanning image AK4 showing the message "missing" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21.

In the feature unit 063AK, it is expected that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state according to the display mode of the normal passing fan image AK1. Based on the degree (ratio) and the expected degree at which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the game ball is expected to be controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the small hit game state, and the game ball in the small hit game state. It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of passing through the loss region 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the normal passing fanning image AK1 and improve the game entertainment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passing fanning image AK1, the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 is the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hitting game state (big hit after the end of the small hitting gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree controlled by the game state), and the time-saving area passing fan image AK3 shows the expected degree that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state (end of the small hit gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree that is later controlled in the time saving state), and the loss area passing fan image AK4 has a display area corresponding to the expected degree that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Is displayed.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure), the first special figure game (first special figure is played). In the special figure game used), the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. .. Corresponding to this, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, in the normal passing fanning effect, it is normal. While the time-passing fan image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10 (a), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, it is normal. In the time-passing fanning effect, the normal time-passing fanning image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10 (b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10 (b), the display area of the time-saving region passing fanned image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10 (a). In addition, in the second special figure game, the normal passing fanning effect shown in FIG. 13-10 (b), which is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit gaming state, is a normal passing fanning image. Except for the difference in the display mode of AK1, the normal passage shown in FIG. 13-10 (a) is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state in the first special figure game. It is a production mode similar to the fanning production.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c), as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c), the time-saving passing fan image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 to emit light, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, a time saving passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it a big hit? Perform an output effect. The time-saving time-saving passing fan image AK5 includes the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the lost region passing fanning image AK4, while the time-saving area passing fanning image AK3 is not included.

Returning to FIG. 13-8 (b), in the normal state, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. A normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed to notify that the player passes through 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, as a normal time jackpot area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a normal time jackpot area passage notification image indicating the message "V" is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the time saving area passage notification effect for notifying that the time saving state is controlled is executed. In the present embodiment, as the time-saving area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving area passage notification image indicating the message "lucky!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the loss area passage notification effect for notifying that the control for changing the game state is not performed is executed. In the present embodiment, as the loss area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a loss area passage notification image indicating the message "Sorry!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (b), when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, as a passing notification effect. , A time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect is executed, which notifies that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. NS. In the present embodiment, as a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving big hit area passage notification image indicating the message "BONUS!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the passing notification effect is produced in response to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned loss area passage notification effect is executed.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the loss area passage notification effect is executed as the passage notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 13-8 (a) and 13-8 (b), in the feature unit 063AK, a small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. When the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state and then the big winning opening 063AK is controlled to the closed state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , Is configured to enable different productions. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed when the grand prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state, and to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (b), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. In addition, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, by executing the time saving area passage notification effect, the player is in a time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by recognizing that it is controlled by.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. By executing the loss area passage notification effect, the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 to the player even though the time saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. Based on the above, it is possible to prevent a feeling of expectation from being controlled to a time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and to suppress a decline in the game interest.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Since different effects can be executed, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the feature unit 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the time saving state, both the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20 pass. It is configured so that the loss area passage notification effect, which is the same effect as when it was not performed, can be executed. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, the player does not perform the control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from having a feeling of expectation that it will be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the passing of the time saving area 063AK20, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Can be done.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (b), it is executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the effect performed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game that is easily executed in the time saving state, and the game ball is in the big hit area when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. When passing through 063AK19, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game which is easy to be executed in the normal state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Is also controlled at a high rate to "big hit A", which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect or the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed, and the game is played. You can improve your interest.

FIG. 13-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 063AKS101, the RAM 102 may read the second hold storage number count value stored in the second hold storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

In the present embodiment, for example, a second special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second special figure game) in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number of them is It stores until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As the pending data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS102, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063AKS103, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to “2” (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure (special figure 2) is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (special figure 1).

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special symbol) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the first start winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS115, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the process of step 063AKS116, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing any of the processes of steps 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". As the table to be used for this purpose, the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step 063AKS105). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a) is set in the used table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b) is set in the table to be used.

In the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for. In the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for.

The first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b) are compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b), the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The table data indicating the determined value indicates whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, and whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit game state. It is the decision data assigned to the decision result.

Further, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b), a larger number of decision values than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a) is "small hit". It is assigned to the special figure display result of. That is, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b) are the second special figure display result determination table. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is high.

Returning to FIG. 13-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 selects the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation in the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing with the decision value assigned to the "big hit" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "big hit" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special figure display result is "big hit" (step 063AKS107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109 to perform a random number lottery, so that the jackpot type is variably displayed in the special figure game as the first special symbol (“variable special figure”). "Big hit A" shown in FIG. 13-13 (a) depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (whether the variable special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"). And "big hit B" (step 063AKS110).

Both "big hit A" and "big hit B" shown in FIG. 13-13 (a) are "non-probable variable big hits" that are not controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. When it is controlled to "big hit A", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit game state until the variable display is executed five times. When it is controlled to "big hit B", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit game state until the variable display is executed once. “Big hit A”, which has a longer period of time controlled to shorten the time after the end of the big hit game state than “big hit B”, has a higher advantage for the player than “big hit B”. In the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (b), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the big hit type is determined to be either "big hit A" or "big hit B". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A" and is not determined to be "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, the rate is higher than that when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game, for the player than "big hit B". It is controlled to "big hit A", which has a high advantage of.

After returning to FIG. 13-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 corresponds to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110, for example, the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 063AKS111), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, when it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the variable display result is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 is for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the determined value assigned to the "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is set as the "small hit". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS118).

After executing the process of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13-14 (b) as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121 to determine whether the small hit type is the first special figure or the second special figure (variation). Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), it is determined to be one of "small hit A" to "small hit E" shown in FIG. 13-14 (a) ( Step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (a), in the "small hit A" and "small hit B", the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, are the distribution members. It is a small hit type that passes through the big hit area 063AK19 by being guided to 063AK28. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned third specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large hit area 063AK19. When the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit A", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state. .. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit B", the big hit gaming state of "big hit B" is completed after the end of the small hit gaming state. Is controlled by.

In the "small hit C" and "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit gaming state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, so that the time saving area 063AK20 is set. It is a small hit type that passes. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit C", the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is controlled to a time saving state. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state of "small hit D", the variable display is executed once after the end of the small hit game state. It is controlled to shorten the time until.

"Small hit E" is a small hit type in which the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the loss area 063AK21. be. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the small hit type is set at a higher rate than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, it is configured to be determined as a "small hit A" controlled by a "big hit A" which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, in the first special figure game. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is played from "Big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. It is controlled by "big hit A", which has a high advantage for the person.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13-14 (b), the total of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B". The value corresponds to the degree of expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Further, the total value of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" is the total value of the game ball in the small hit gaming state in the time saving area 063AK20. It corresponds to the expectation degree that is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through. Further, the ratio at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" is a control that changes the game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Corresponds to the expectation that will not be done.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the ratio (15%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the small hit type is ". The ratio (15%) determined as "small hit D" and the total value (30%) are determined so that the small hit type is "small hit C" when the variable special figure is the first special figure. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the ratio (15%) and the ratio (10%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game, in the small hit game state. The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and is configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final special symbol of the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

After returning to FIG. 13-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 corresponds to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122, for example, a small hit which is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102. By setting the type buffer value or the like (step 063AKS123), the determined small hit type is stored. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it is set to "1", and if it is "small hit C", it is set to "2". If it is a "small hit D", it may be set to "3", and if it is a "small hit E", it may be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, when it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is not determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the process of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 The definite special symbol is determined in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, and the like (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then ends the special symbol normal process. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the special symbol normal processing.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be any of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIGS. 13-15.

As shown in FIGS. 13-15, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the case where the variable display result is "big hit" are supported. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" are set in advance.

In the present embodiment, three types of super reach, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, are set, and a normal reach effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 13-15. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed together with the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, and PA5-1. Fluctuation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. -3, PB5-3, and. In the present embodiment, as a reach effect of the super reach A, an effect of displaying a character image indicating the character A is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as a reach effect of the super reach B, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character B is performed, and as a reach effect of the super reach C, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character C is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include fluctuation patterns PA4-1 and PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is executed. Fluctuation patterns PA5-1 and PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is not executed are included.

FIG. 13-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as the variation pattern setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 063AK201). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-17 to display the fluctuation pattern as "variable display result". It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the case of "big hit" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PB3- in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB3-1. The reach effect of Super Reach A is determined at a rate higher than that of the variation pattern PB3-2. Is determined in the variation pattern PB3-3 to be executed. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. The time is higher than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed, and the time is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 13-16, when it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-18 to display the fluctuation pattern in a variable display result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "loss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 13-18, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is executed at a rate lower than that of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PB2-1. The reach effect of Super Reach A is determined to be the variation pattern PB2-2, which is higher than the variation pattern PB2-2. Is determined in the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 13-16, when it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state. Determine (step 063AKS209). The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-19 (a). , Depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern is changed to correspond to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of PA4-1 to PB4-3 (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state shown in FIG. 13-19 (b). As a result, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern can be changed to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect can be achieved. It is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that are not executed (step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, while when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the time saving state, the small hit fluctuation is executed. The time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-19 (b), the small hit type is the game ball. When is a "small hit A" or a "small hit B" passing through the big hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. The variation pattern PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed is determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, PB5-3 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-19 (b), the small hit type is the game ball. When is a "small hit C" or a "small hit D" passing through the time saving region 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. Fluctuation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed are determined, and variation patterns PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, PB5-1 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (the degree of expectation of passing through the time saving area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 13-16, after executing the process of step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211th, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 determines the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Set the transmission (step 063AKS205). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure hold storage number specification command (1 deducted 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially executed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure hold storage number specification command (The second special figure reserved memory count value reduced by 1, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially executed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. In the present embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" is used. , The decision result of which of the multiple types of jackpots should be used when the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type determination result), and multiple types of small hit types when the variable display result is "small hit" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (small hit type determination result) of which one to be used.

After executing the process of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 063AKS206), and then ends the special symbol normal process.

FIG. 13-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol stop process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 063AKS301). Here, the special figure confirmation display in-display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305, which will be described later, in response to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063AKS302), and issues a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12. Make settings for transmission (step 063AKS303). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmation display time timer value, which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmation display time. After that, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmation display flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmation display flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the special figure confirmation is performed according to whether or not the updated special figure confirmation display time timer value is "0". It may be determined whether or not the display time has elapsed. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated to wait until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special figure confirmation display flag and turns it off (step 063AKS307), and then is the jackpot flag turned on? It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start effect waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start effect time when the jackpot start effect (big hit fanfare effect) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect waiting time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (big hit fanfare command) corresponding to the big hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS311), and clears the time saving flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command (effect control command for designating the current game state in pachinko game 1) indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step). 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the open count value, which is a stored value of the open count counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds (15 in the present embodiment) in the jackpot game state (15 times in the present embodiment). In this embodiment, it is set to "15") (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time reduction counter (063AKS315). The time reduction counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and counts the time reduction number, which is the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time reduction counter is cleared, so that the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is set to "0" as the initial value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

When it is determined in step 063AKS317 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small hit start production waiting time corresponds to the small hit start production time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time by referring to the small hit start effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13-21, and the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit A" to ". It is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to which of the small hit E ”, and is a stored value of the small hit start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. The hit start effect waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect waiting time. The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. Then, the waiting time for the small hit start effect is also determined at the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect waiting time is also the second specific corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the second specific time. Determined by time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect waiting time is also determined to be the first specific time corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the first specific time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS320). ..

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small hit flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS322), and the opening number count value corresponds to the upper limit opening number of opening and closing of the large winning opening in the small hit game state (10 times in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, "10") is set to a value to be set (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the process of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS325). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the time reduction count value (step 063AKS326), and the updated time reduction count value is "0". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time reduction count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), and transmits a game state specification command indicating the normal state. (Step 063AKS329) is performed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

FIG. 13-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special symbol process processing as the small hit opening preprocessing with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening pre-processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start effect waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start is started depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect waiting time timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not the production waiting time has elapsed. When it is determined that the small hit start effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit release pre-processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS401 that the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “9” which is a value corresponding to the process during the small hit opening (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening preprocessing.

FIG. 13-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the process during the opening of the small hit with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening count value is “0” (step 063AKS501). When it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is a predetermined upper limit in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (10 in this embodiment) or more (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number.

When it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 063AK4 is less than the maximum number of winnings (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the on state. (Step 063AKS504), the setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is made (step 063AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the release count value (step 063AKS506).

After executing the process of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the small hit opening. When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the off state. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the process of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the process during the small hit opening.

When it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the open count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and the game ball holding time elapses depending on whether or not the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 is in the small hit gaming state depending on whether or not any of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the losing area passing flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on. It is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot region passage switch 063AK22 is turned on (big hit region). It is determined (whether or not the passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the big hit area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the big hit area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519), and ends the processing during the small hit opening.

When it is determined in step 063AKS518 that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 detects the game ball). Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS520). When it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS522), and ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the losing area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (the losing area passing switch 063AK24 detects the game ball. Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS523). When it is determined that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 is lost. The area passage flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS524), and the processing during the small hit opening process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes). Occasionally, the lost area passage flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passing flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, when it is determined that the game ball has passed any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 wins the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not all the game balls have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 includes the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (big hit). The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (the number of times the game ball was detected by the time saving area discharge count switch), and the lost area discharge count switch. Whether or not the total value of the number of game balls detected by (the number of times the game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the grand prize opening switch 063AK5. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In step 063AKS513, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have not been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the small hit opening process. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the distribution member operation pattern by the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to end the according operation (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state or the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state as a hit end designation command according to the small hit, and changes to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. An effect control command indicating the type of big hit in the case of being controlled and the number of variable displays controlled in the time saving state in the case of being controlled in the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 13-24 to determine the states of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the lost area passing flag, and the small hit type. According to the above, one of the small hit end designation command 1 to the small hit end designation command 5 is selected as the hit end designation command according to the small hit, and the setting for transmitting the selected command is made.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-24, when the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit A", "big hit A" is completed after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 1 indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit game state is selected. When the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit B", it indicates that the small hit is controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. The end specification command 2 is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit C", the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the command is to be performed is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit D", the time saving state is controlled for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once. The small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the command is to be executed is transmitted. When the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the small hit end specification command 5 indicating that the control to change the game state is not performed after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted regardless of the small hit type. Will be done.

After returning to FIG. 13-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passage notification effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first special time to third special time (step 063AKS516). The passage notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passage notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to the state of the jackpot area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the lost area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13-25. Correspondingly, it was determined to be one of the first special time to the third special time, and the passage notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, was determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passage notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 13-25, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passing flag is turned on. When is set to, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time. NS.

After returning to FIG. 13-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “10” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step 063AKS517), and releases the small hit. End the middle process.

FIG. 13-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of the special symbol process process as the small hit end process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passage notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and waits for the passage notification effect depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". Determine if time has passed. When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit end process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the big hit type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small hit type is "small hit A" controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "big hit A". While setting the corresponding "0", if the small hit type is "small hit B" which is controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit B". Set to "1" corresponding to "". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS605), and transmits a hit start designation command according to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and transmits a game state designation command indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Make the settings (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the open number count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time reduction counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the large hit release pre-processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small hit end processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612). When it is determined that the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving number count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small hit type is "small hit C", which is controlled to be in a time saving state over a period from the end of the small hit gaming state until the variable display is executed five times, the time saving count value. Is set to "5", while if the small hit type is "small hit D", which is controlled to be in a time saving state for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, the time saving count is counted. Set the value to "1". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the game state designation command indicating the time saving state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

When it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time saving area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the losing area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the process of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 063AKS618), and then performs the small hit end process. finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit end process is started in response to the completion of the small hit opening process in which the large winning opening is opened, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612). ; Yes), in the small hit end process, the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is not controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. It is configured.

In the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the feature unit 063AK executes each of the above-described processes as the process in the special symbol process process in step S25, and also executes the above-described processes as the information output process in step S23. Similarly, the process shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 12-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the information output process of step S23, the feature unit 063AK has the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit and the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit and the jackpot is being hit or the time is shortened (in the special prize). In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that there is), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time is being shortened is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving state is controlled based on the end of the big hit game state, and in the normal state, the game ball which has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state has the time saving area 063AK4. In either case, the time saving state is controlled after the end of the small hit game state based on the passage, or the time saving state or the consecutive villa state can be preferably specified in the external device.

FIG. 13-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled. When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time reduction counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is updated by subtracting one (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time reduction counter counts the number of time reductions (the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state).

After executing the process of step 063AKS702, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the time reduction number notification effect for notifying the time reduction number of times (step 063AKS703). In the present embodiment, as the time reduction number notification effect, an effect of displaying a time reduction number notification image indicating the time reduction number on the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed. In the time reduction number notification effect, the time reduction number notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current time reduction number based on the sub-side time reduction count value. In the present embodiment, the time saving number notification effect is executed when the variable display is executed in the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the right-handed promotion effect flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). When it is determined that the right-handed promotion effect flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the right-handed promotion effect flag to the on state (step 063AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed promotion effect. (Step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting for executing the time saving rush effect to notify that the control to the time saving state has started (controlled from the normal state to the time saving state). (Step 063AKS707). In the present embodiment, as the time saving rush effect, the first time saving rush image showing the message "time saving!" And the message "Put the ball into the electric chew aiming to the right!" Are shown on the screen of the image display device 5. The effect of displaying the second time-saving rush image is executed. The second time-saving rush image is a production image that urges the player to win a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In the present embodiment, the time saving rush effect is executed when the variable display is first executed after being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, when it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), and when it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-handed promotion effect flag is on. (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration that is a jackpot combination as a final stop symbol that is a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. The combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a random number lottery by referring to the decoration symbol determination table of the jackpot combination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 to obtain the decoration symbol of the jackpot combination as the final decoration symbol. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS708 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the special figure based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be a lost combination as the final decorative symbol (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a random number lottery by referring to the decoration symbol determination table of the loss combination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 to obtain the decoration symbol of the loss combination as the final decoration symbol. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS712). ..

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal state small hit time confirmation decoration symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 13-28 (b). By performing a random number lottery using this, as a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a small hit combination according to which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E", FIG. 13 Any one of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in −28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS713). Which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the display result designation command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit time confirmation decorative symbol for the time saving state shown in FIGS. 13-28 (c). By performing a random number lottery using the table, depending on which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E", the small hit combination is a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol). One of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in FIG. 13-28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

In the first small hit symbol shown in FIG. 13-28 (a), the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and is "middle". This is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in red indicating the message "V" suggesting that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. As for the second small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the big hit is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a blue rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "V" suggesting that the game is controlled is displayed. As for the third small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and the time is shortened in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a red rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "hour" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 4th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and the time is shortened in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a blue rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "hour" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 5th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a white rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "small" is displayed. The first small hit symbol and the second small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled. The third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the time saving state is controlled.

In the small hit determination decorative symbol determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-28 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. , The fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the 4th small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small hit symbol, and is determined to be the 3rd small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 4th small hit symbol, and is determined from the 3rd small hit symbol. Is also determined as the second small hit symbol at a high rate, and is determined as the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol. This is higher than when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed. It was higher, and when the 3rd small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol, it was higher than when the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed, and the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol. The time is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 (b), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol suggesting that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled to the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small hit pattern. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, the player can derive and display the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled in the time saving state. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state, and the game interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (b), the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. In the case of "small hit D", the fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the fifth small hit symbol, and is determined to be the second small hit symbol at a higher rate than the first small hit symbol. , The fourth small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol, and the third small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the fourth small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state is when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. However, it is higher than when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the 2nd small hit symbol is derived and displayed. , When the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol, it is higher than when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol. Is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the small hit time-saving fixed decoration symbol determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-28 (c), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit suggesting that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled to the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is not determined as a winning symbol. According to such a configuration, in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed, but the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decorative symbol. The third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and the player is expected to be controlled to the time saving state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it is possible to prevent the player from being hugged and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. As described above, in the present embodiment, the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled in the time saving state in the normal state, can be derived and displayed, while the fixed decoration in the time saving state can be derived and displayed. Since the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is not derived and displayed as a symbol, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

Returning to FIG. 13-27, after executing the processes of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of effect control patterns (special figure variation time effect control pattern) prepared (set) in advance according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. ), And set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time saving number of times notification effect is made in step 063AKS703, the effect control pattern (time saving number of times notification effect control pattern) corresponding to the time saving number of times notification effect is selected and used in step 063AKS715. Set as a pattern. When the setting for executing the time saving rush effect control is made in step 063AKS707, as the effect control pattern (time saving rush effect control pattern) to select and use the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving rush effect in step 063AKS715. set.

After executing the process of step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. Set (step 063AKS716).

After executing the process of step 063AKS716, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting variable display of a decorative pattern or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 transmits, for example, a display control command (command) specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Variable display of decorative symbols is started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 sets the settings for updating the display of the hold display or the active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and performs the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 13-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the effect processing during variable display is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer. Is determined (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates). ) To determine whether or not the end code has been read corresponding to the updated timer value, thereby determining whether or not the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the reach effect period in which the reach effect is executed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. (Step 063AKS802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 063AKS802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 063AKS803).

After executing the process of step 063AKS803, or when it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not the reach effect period (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of time reductions based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not it is the time saving number of times notification effect period in which the notification effect is executed (step 063AKS804). The time reduction number notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time reduction number notification effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time reduction number notification effect period is reached (step 063AKS804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time reduction number notification effect (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or when it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time saving number notification effect period (step 063AKS804; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not the time saving suggestion effect is executed in the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806). The time saving suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving suggestion effect period is reached (step 063AKS806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving suggestion effect (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807, or when it is determined in step 063AKS806 that it is not the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. It is determined whether or not the rush effect is executed in the time-saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808). The time-saving rush effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving rush effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving rush effect period is reached (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving rush effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the process of step 063AKS809, or when it is determined in step 063AKS808 that it is not the time saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715. Based on this, other control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step 063AKS810), and the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect processing during variable display.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby performing "left" and "middle". In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "right", the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process. It is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 13-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S173 of the effect control process process as the special figure hit wait process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the special figure hit waiting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904) to promote right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS906).

After executing the process of step 063AKS906, or when it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), the sub-side time saving count value is not "0" in step 063AKS903. When the determination is made (step 063AKS903; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step 063AKS907), and waits for the special figure. To finish.

When it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect time. After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the jackpot start effect (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the effect process flag to "6", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot. After updating (step 063AKS911), the waiting process for hitting the special figure is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS908 that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received. Determine (step 063AKS912). When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure hit waiting process.

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time to any of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time by referring to the small hit start effect time determination table shown in FIG. 13-30 (b), and the small hit type is “small hit”. Depending on which of "A" to "small hit E", it is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time, and the stored value of the small hit start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. The small hit start effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect time. The small hit type may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (b), in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, and when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect The time is set to the first specific time.

After returning to FIG. 13-30 (a) and executing the process of step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the small hit start effect (step 063AKS914), and sets the value of the effect process flag during the small hit. After updating to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing (step 063AKS915), the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 13-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the effect control process process as the small hit medium effect process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit middle effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start effect time elapses depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start effect end flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS1001; Yes). Step 063AKS1002). When it is determined that the small hit start effect end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the small hit start effect (step 063AKS1004) and turns on the small hit start effect end flag. Set to the state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal time passing fanning effect (step 063AKS1007), and ends the small hit medium effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving time passing fanning effect (step 063AKS1008), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1002 that the small hit start effect end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1002; Yes). Step 063AKS1003). When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit middle effect process.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the small hit start effect end flag, sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), and passes. After controlling to end the normal time passing fanning effect or the time saving passing fanning effect being executed as the time fanning effect (step 063AKS1010), the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect processing. Update to 5 ”(step 063AKS1011).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. Determine (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the third special time (step 063AKS1012; Yes). Step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passage notification effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the passage notification effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal large hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1015), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do. When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving big hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1016), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the second special time (step 063AKS1017; Yes). Step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1018, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the first special. Set to time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1020, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the loss area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

FIG. 13-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the effect control process process as the small hit end effect process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the passage notification effect time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passage notification effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the passage notification effect time has elapsed depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect time timer value is "0". Is determined. When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit end effect process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the small hit end specification command 1 and the small hit end specification command 2 as the hit end specification commands according to the small hits. It is determined whether or not any of them has been received (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time. (Step 063AKS1103), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step 063AKS1104), and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS1106). ).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the effect control CPU 120 receives a sub-hit end designation command 3 or a small hit end designation command 4 as a hit end designation command according to the small hit. The side time reduction count value is set (step 063AKS1107). When the small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed five times, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "5". When the small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "1".

When it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the effect control CPU 120 has the sub-side time reduction flag turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110) to promote right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or when it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), the sub-side time saving count value is "0" in step 063AKS1109. If it is determined that this is not the case (step 063AKS1109; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and makes a small hit. End The production process ends.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation according to the feature unit 063AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-33 to 13-36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 13-33 and 13-34, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the normal state will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, and during the small hit variation, the reach effect of Super Reach A and the time saving suggestion effect are executed, and the third small hit symbol is executed as the final decorative symbol. Will be described using an example in which is derived and displayed.

In the normal state, FIGS. 13-33 (a) show the lost symbols (“135”) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates the stopped display state. In FIG. 13-33 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the normal state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state that is being done.

FIG. 13-33 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the reach effect of the super reach A. ..

In FIG. 13-33 (d), the time saving suggestion effect is started, and a predetermined lost symbol (“767”) is provisionally set in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Indicates the stopped display state. FIG. 13-24 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the time saving suggestion effect. FIG. 13-33 (f) shows a state in which the time saving suggestion symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time saving suggestion effect. There is. FIG. 13-33 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the time saving suggestion effect. Shown.

In FIGS. 13-33 (h), the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIG. 13-33 (i), the control to the small hit game state is started, and as the small hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and "Aim to the right! The right arrow image AK8 showing the message "" and the small hit start image AK9 showing the message "Put the ball here!" Are executed while showing the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7. Indicates the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 13-33 (i), the right-handed promotion effect is started in response to the start of control to the small hit game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing in the right direction is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5.

In the normal state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-33 (i) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (a) is executed. FIG. 13-34 (a) shows a state in which the normal passage fanning effect is being executed. In the normal time passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (a), the big hit area passing fanning image AK2, the time saving area passing fanning image AK3, and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The normal time passing fan image AK1 including the Is it a short time? Is it a loss? "

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the normal pass fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (b) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. FIG. 13-34 (b) shows a state in which the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed and the normal time jackpot area passage notification image AK10 indicating the message “V” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

FIG. 13-34 (c) shows that after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit game state is controlled, and as a big hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction. Shows the state in which the effect of displaying the first jackpot start image AK11 showing the message "Aim to the right!" And the second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball into the attacker!" Is being executed. There is. The second big hit start image AK12 is a production image that urges the player to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in FIG. 13-34 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 while the normal time passing fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK20. FIG. 13-34 (d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving area passage notification image AK13 indicating the message “lucky!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 13-34 (e) shows the screen of the image display device 5 as a time saving rush effect, in which the normal state is controlled to the time saving state according to the start of the next variable display after the small hit game state is finished. In addition, the effect of displaying the first time-saving rush image AK14 showing the message "Time saving!" And the second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim at the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" Is executed. Indicates the state of. In the state shown in FIG. 13-34 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 13-34 (e), the time reduction number notification effect is executed according to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of times is four.

Next, in the normal state, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 while the normal pass fanning effect is being executed will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-34 (f) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the loss region 063AK21. FIG. 13-34 (f) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 indicating the message “Sorry!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 13-34 (g), after the small hit game state is completed, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-35 and 13-36. Specifically, hereinafter, a case where the small hit fluctuation is executed in the time saving state, the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed during the small hit fluctuation, and the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. It will be described using an example.

In FIG. 13-35 (a), the lost symbols (“135”) are shown in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5 in the time saving state. Indicates the stopped display state. In the state shown in FIG. 13-35 (a), the right-handed promotion effect is executed, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 13-35 (a), the time reduction number notification effect is executed, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the time reduction number is 4 times. It is displayed in the mode.

In FIG. 13-35 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the time saving state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state that is being done. In the state shown in FIG. 13-35 (b), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is 3 times. Has been done.

FIG. 13-35 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed, and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 13-35 (d), the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIG. 13-35 (e), the control to the small hit game state is started, the small hit start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Indicates the state. In the state shown in FIG. 13-35 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed in response to the start of control to the small hit game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

In the time saving state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-35 (e) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-36 (a) is executed. FIG. 13-36 (a) shows a state in which the time-saving time-passing fanning effect is being executed. In the time-saving time-passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 13-36 (a), the time-saving time-passing fanning image including the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. AK5 is displayed, and the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light. An effect is performed to output a short-time passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it?"

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the time-saving time-saving passing fanning effect is being executed in the time-saving state will be described.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-36 (b) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. FIG. 13-36 (b) shows a state in which the time-saving big hit area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving big hit area passage notification image AK18 indicating the message “BONUS!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Shown.

In FIG. 13-36 (c), after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit start effect is executed under the control of the big hit game state, and the first big hit start image AK11 and the second big hit are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The state in which the start image AK12 is displayed is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 13-36 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 while the time-saving time-passing fanning effect is being executed in the time-saving state will be described. In the time saving state, the same effect operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-36 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21. Will be done. FIG. 13-36 (d) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 13-36 (e), after the small hit game state is completed, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”. In the state shown in FIG. 13-36 (e), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is twice. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 13-36 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in.

As described above, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). When the game ball (game medium) passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (special area) when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the time saving from the normal state is shortened. While controlling to the state (special state), the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game when the time is shortened, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball is shortened. When the region 063AK20 is passed, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and the time saving state. In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. .. According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the same effect is produced when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It is configured to be viable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, different effects are variably displayed depending on whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. It is configured to be executable during execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect suggesting that can be executed during the execution of the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, it is higher than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the first special symbol game. It is configured to be controlled in a time-saving state at a rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite special symbol in the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, the display mode of the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, so that the hold display can be changed. In the display, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to the small hit gaming state or is controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state is either the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. The hold display change effect for notifying the passing of the image may be made feasible.

For example, by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started yet by the hold display change effect, the display color of the hold display is changed to blue, green, or red, which is different from the normal white color, so that the hold display can be displayed. The game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to the small hit game state by making the change in the display mode recognizable and controlled to the open state in the small hit game state, has the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area. It may be configured so that it can be suggested that it passes through either 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the hold display change effect is configured to be executable as a look-ahead notice, the look-ahead judgment is performed based on the occurrence of the start prize in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. You just have to be. In the look-ahead determination, for example, a random number lottery is performed by referring to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (b). , Fig. 13-14 when the process of pre-reading the variable display result to be "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", or when the variable display result is "small hit" is judged to be pre-reading. By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), a process of pre-reading and determining which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E" is to be performed is performed. Just do it. After that, in the start winning determination process, a setting for transmitting a start winning command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination may be made.

The start prize command that has been set to be transmitted in the start prize determination process is mainly generated by executing the command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 at the time of starting winning by executing the command analysis process in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It may be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-reading notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process, whether or not the hold display change effect as the pre-reading notice effect is executed in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11. And the execution mode may be determined.

In the hold storage that is stored when determining whether to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode, the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result are "small hit", and the small hit type is , After the end of the variable display executed first, that is, the destination, when any of the "small hit C" or the "small hit D" hold in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is included. By changing from the normal state to the time saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target, the variable display is performed at the time of pre-reading and at the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target. Results and variation patterns may vary. In such a case, there will be an inconsistency between the suggested content of the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect and the actual variable display result or variation pattern, which will lead to distrust of the player and reduce the game interest. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". And, if any of the above is included, the execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C". When none of the hold that becomes "small hit D" is included, according to the variable display result and the small hit type according to the decision ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-37 (a). , Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode may be determined. On the other hand, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". When any of the above is included, the variable display result and the small hit are according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-37 (b). Depending on the type, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode may be determined. In the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". Whether or not is included may be determined by checking the contents of the buffer at the time of starting winning.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (a), when the variable display result is "big hit", the hold display change effect is held at a higher rate than it is determined not to be executed (white). The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the hold display is determined to be green at a rate higher than blue, and the display mode of the hold display is determined to be red at a rate higher than green. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, and when the hold display is displayed in green, it is in blue. It is higher than when it is displayed, and when the hold display is displayed in blue, it is higher than when it is displayed in white (when the hold display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the limited time hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (b), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation is green or higher is restricted. In the example shown in FIG. 13-37 (b), the hold display change effect in which the hold display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be limited to "no execution".

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-37 (a) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-37 (b), when the variable display result is "small hit", the variable display is made. An example is shown in which the display mode is determined in the same manner as when the result is "big hit", but this is only an example, the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit A" or When it becomes "small hit B" When the display mode peculiar to it (for example, "big hit?") Or the variable display result becomes "small hit" and the small hit type becomes "small hit C" or "small hit D". There may be a unique display mode (“hour?”). With such a configuration, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

In the above embodiment, the special figure display result is "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state is completed, and the small hit type is the game ball in the time saving area 063AK20. Even if it is configured so that different effects can be executed depending on whether a hold memory that becomes a "small hit C" or a "small hit D" passing through the above is included and a case where such a hold memory is not included. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game that is stored after the time saving state ends, the special figure display result becomes "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold memory that becomes There is a hold in which the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in the hold memory corresponding to). Just do it. On the other hand, the special figure display result becomes "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold that becomes is not included, it will not be controlled to the time saving state again by any of the remaining holds (the special figure display result will be "small hit" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game. , There is no hold for which the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect are the effects in which the combination of different decorative symbols is stopped and displayed after performing the effect of inciting whether or not the time is controlled again as a common effect. All you need is.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit variation, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The jackpot fanning effect suggesting that the ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss zone 063AK21 can be executed, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, after performing a loss effect suggesting that the game ball did not pass through the big hit area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and based on the passage, the time saving state is set after the end of the small hit game state. Relief effects suggesting that they are controlled may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, as a big hit fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (a), a message "big hit" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. An effect of displaying the jackpot fanning image AK19 including the image AK20, the loss suggestion image AK21 which indicates the message of “loss” and suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 may be configured to be feasible. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, as a loss effect, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (b), an effect of highlighting the loss suggestion image AK21 included in the jackpot fanning image AK19. Just execute. In the state shown in FIG. 13-38 (b), the frame line of the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 which is not highlighted, so that the loss suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. There is. After performing the effect operation shown in FIG. 13-38 (b) as the loss effect, as a relief effect, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c), a part of the area where the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed is displayed. The message "time saving" is displayed, the time saving suggestion image AK22 suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 is displayed, the highlighting of the loss suggestion image AK21 is finished, and the time saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted. All you have to do is execute the production. In the state shown in FIG. 13-38 (c), the frame line of the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame lines of the unhighlighted jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the loss suggestion image AK21, so that the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed. Is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13-11, after deciding whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "big hit" (step 063AKS106), the special figure display result is displayed in step 063AKS106. When it is determined that the "big hit" is not determined (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only an example, and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. Can be executed in the order of. For example, after executing a process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit", when the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" in the process, the special figure is displayed. It may be configured to execute a process of determining whether or not the result is a "big hit". Alternatively, by determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by a single process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "big hit". The process of determining whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be executed at the same time.

In the above embodiment, only one of the game balls that won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one is Except for the game ball, it has been described that the ball is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is only an example, and a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state are configured to enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this configuration, one game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18, passes through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and then at least one or more other game balls. May enter the distribution section 063AK18 and pass through the other regions of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21. In this case, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passed through any of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. Based on the above, the game state after the small hit game state ends may be controlled. For example, when the game ball that first enters the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, even if another game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 after the passage, the first Based on the fact that the game ball of No. 1 has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, the big hit game state may be controlled after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, of the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, which of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 was passed by the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18. The game state after the small hit game state ends may be controlled based on the above. For example, when the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, it is assumed that another game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 before the passage. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, the big hit game state may be controlled after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, a plurality of game balls that have set priorities in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, have the jackpot area 063AK19. , Time saving area 063AK20 and loss area 063AK21, when passing through multiple areas, the game after the small hit game state ends based on the passage to the area with the highest priority among the areas passed by the game ball. You may control the state. For example, the priority of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the losing area 063AK21. In this case, when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21, respectively, the game balls pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 having the highest priority. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

In the above embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is performed. I explained it as something that couldn't be done. However, this is only an example, and in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage. By performing the time saving transition control and controlling the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state, the period controlled to the time saving state may be extended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this case, the effect of notifying that the period controlled to the time saving state has been extended based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state is produced. It may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, as an effect of notifying that the period controlled in the time saving state has been extended, a time saving number recovery effect of increasing the time saving number indicated by the time saving number notification image AK16 may be performed.

In this case, in the time saving state, without suggesting the passage of the time saving area 063AK20, the suggestion regarding the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21 is given (the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20). It is suggested that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21 without suggesting). Suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. ) It may be configured so that the normal passing fanning effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state has the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. An effect suggesting which of the two should be passed may be configured to be feasible during the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, the small hit variation suggests that the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. If the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is produced. If the small hit type is "small hit E", which is executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, a small hit suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It may be configured to be executed during the execution of the fluctuation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect are started in response to the end of the small hit variation, the end of the small hit start effect, and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. It was explained as. However, this is only an example, and the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect may be configured to be able to start from the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In particular, when the normal time passing fanning effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, the game ball is hit in the small hit game state by displaying the normal passing fanning image AK1 during the execution of the small hit fluctuation. Based on the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through the area 063AK19, and the small hit game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and the game interest can be improved.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area passing notification image AK13 indicating the message "lucky!" Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, it is a pity! The loss region passage notification image AK17 indicating the message “” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the loss region passage notification effect is executed. However, this is only an example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It may be a production of. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted. It is also possible to perform an effect of not emitting light (turning off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification voice indicating the message "time saving!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the game ball outputs the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. When passing through, the effect of not outputting the notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time saving area 063AK20, and a loss area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured so as to include a time saving area 063AK20 but not a jackpot area 063AK19 or a loss area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving regions 063AK20. In this case, in the small hit gaming state, the time saving state may be controlled for different periods after the small hit gaming state ends, depending on which of the plurality of time saving regions 063AK20 the game ball has passed through. good. For example, the time saving area 063AK20 is configured to include a first time saving area and a second time saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving area in the small hit game state, the small hit game state. After the end of, the time reduction state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed five times, while when the game ball passes through the second time reduction area in the small hit game state, after the small hit game state ends. , It may be configured to control the time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the plurality of time-saving regions 063AK20 the game ball passes through in the small hit game state, and improve the game interest.

In the above embodiment, in the low probability low base state as the normal state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hitting game state, and the small hitting game state is performed. It was explained that it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of. However, this is only an example, and in the high-accuracy low-base state, the time-saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time-saving region 063AK20 in the small-hit gaming state, and the small-hit gaming state is performed. It may be configured to be controlled to a time saving state after the end of.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration relating to the feature portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

For example, the feature unit 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK, the production is performed in the first period such as the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C as predetermined effects. An effect moving image having a progress speed of the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and the progress speed of the effect is the first in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period. An effect moving image having a second speed slower than the speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the effect sound in both the first period and the second period. The speeds related to the above may be configured to be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the super reach A to the predetermined effect Since the speed related to the effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 063AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. In pachinko game machine 1 etc.)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) has a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy to enter, and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, a game ball). Variable means that can be controlled (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect corresponding to variable display.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 13-6 and 13) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. -8, Fig. 13-23, etc.),
The state control means
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the above-mentioned is performed based on the passage. Control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 13-23, 13-26, etc.).
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, control based on the passage is performed. (For example, Fig. 13-23, Fig. 13-26, etc.),
The effect executing means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium passes through the special area. In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game medium passes through the special area. (For example, FIG. 13-8, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-24, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-34, FIG. 13-36, etc.).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19).
The state control means can control the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific region (for example, FIGS. 13-23, 13-26, etc.).
The effect executing means is the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area and the special area in the special state. Is feasible (eg, FIGS. 13-8, 13-23, 13-24, 13-31, 13-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 13). -8, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-24, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-34, FIG. 13-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, 13-15, 13-16, 13-19, 13-33, 13-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means brings the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting that it is controlled (for example, a time saving suggestion effect) can be executed during execution of the variable display (for example, FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, 13-15, 13-16, 13). -19, Fig. 13-33, Fig. 13-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (5) according to the feature unit 063AK,
Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure game) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special figure game) can be executed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is higher than when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information. (For example, FIG. 13-14),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, and to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 064AK)
The feature section 063AK includes the feature section 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 064AK is
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) in which variable display can be executed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) that has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19) and a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy for a game medium (for example, a game ball) to enter, and a game A second state in which the medium is inaccessible or difficult to enter (for example, a closed state), a variable means that can be controlled (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7), and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect corresponding to variable display.
The state control means
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the advantageous state can be controlled (for example, FIGS. 13-23, 13-26, etc.).
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special region, it is possible to control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 13-23, 13-26, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect (for example, a normal passing fanning effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area. Yes (eg, FIGS. 13-8, 13-10, 13-31, 13-34, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state and the game medium passes through the special region, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. No (eg, Figures 13-23, 13-26, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 13-8, 13-10, 13-31, 13-34, etc.).
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect (for example, a time-saving time-passing fanning effect) that suggests the passage of the specific area without suggesting the passage of the special area is performed. ) (For example, FIG. 13-8, FIG. 13-10, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 13). -8, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-24, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-34, FIG. 13-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 13-6 and 13-) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable table result. 8, Fig. 13-23, etc.),
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, 13-15, 13-16, 13-19, 13-33, 13-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means brings the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting that it is controlled (for example, a time saving suggestion effect) can be executed during execution of the variable display (for example, FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, 13-15, 13-16, 13). -19, Fig. 13-33, Fig. 13-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (3) to (5) according to the feature unit 064AK,
In the effect executing means, when the special display result is derived as a variable display result, the variable means is controlled to the first state, and then the variable means is controlled to the second state, the game medium is released. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area or the special area (for example, FIGS. 13-8, 13-23, 13-24, 13-31). , Fig. 13-34, Fig. 13-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature 065AK)
The feature unit 065AK will be described. In the feature section 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it was possible to control to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is the predetermined "time saving symbol" among the "normal symbol loss". When becomes, it is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the game may shift from the low base state to the high base state without going through the jackpot game state, so that it is possible to provide unexpected game playability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, when the display result of the normal symbol is "time saving symbol", the state shifts from the low base state to the high base state even during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It has become like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of suggesting / notifying the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. It is possible to suggest and notify that the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" or "time saving symbol", or the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" by the predetermined effect. With such a predetermined effect, the player can expect which display result is suggested / notified, and the interest is improved.

(Structure of feature 065AK)
FIG. 14-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 having the feature portion 065AK, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description shown in FIG. 1 in the arrangement of a part of the configuration. In addition, here, the part different from FIG. 1 will be mainly described, and the same number will be assigned to the same configuration and the description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK shown in FIG. 14-1, the gaming ball launched from the hitting ball launching device is the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the image display device. It is guided to the lower side of the game area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and either wins (enters) each winning opening or goes to the out opening without entering any winning opening. It is captured.

Launching the game ball so that the game ball passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed, and launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. Making it right-handed is called right-handed. The area where the left-handed game ball can be guided is called the left area, and the area where the right-handed game ball can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 and in the left region of the gaming area as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description, while the winning ball device 6A is a variable winning machine. The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided in the lower right region of the image display device 5 and in the right region of the game area. Therefore, in the high base state in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is open, or in the big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open, the game is played by hitting right. In the low base state where the winning opening is not opened, the game is played by left-handed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, the passing gates 41 are provided in the left region and the right region, so that the normal drawing game can be easily executed even in the low base state where the game is played by left-handed hitting. .. As a result, in the low base state, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time saving symbol", and it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the high base state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, general winning openings 10 are provided in the left region and the right region. The general winning opening 10 may be provided in either area.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the gaming area, and the attacker lamp 9c is a special variable winning prize in the gaming board 2. It is provided near the ball device 7. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a position above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Subsequently, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK will be described. FIG. 14-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process process executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 is in the ON state, that is, the game ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the gate switch pass process (step S412). do.

In the gate switch passing process in step S412, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value is not reached, the count value of the gate passing storage counter is incremented by 1, the value of the random number for normal symbol determination, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing storage number. In addition, the number of lights of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is increased by 1. After that, one of the processes of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, the CPU 103 is not in a state where the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol variation display is not executed in the normal symbol display 20 and the variable winning prize is obtained. If the ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the number of stored gates is not 0, the value of the random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in FIG. 14-3. Using the determination table, it is determined whether or not to make a hit (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol) and whether or not to make a time-saving symbol. If the game state is in the low base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), and if the game state is in the high base state (if the time saving flag is set). For example, the table shown in FIG. 14-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 normally sets a value corresponding to the variable display time (normal symbol fluctuation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer. Start the symbol process timer. In addition, a control for transmitting a command for designating the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the effect control board 12 is executed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“2” in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes variable display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“3” in this example) indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S403). ..

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 in the normal symbol stop processing in step S403. Then, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation time (stop symbol display time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol process timer, and when the timer times out, the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Check if it exists. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), if it is a time-saving symbol, the process for starting the time-saving state is executed. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal symbol process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“4” in this example) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process (step S404).

The CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 6B to the open state in the process during opening of the ordinary electric accessory in step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which a determination value regarding the display result of the normal symbol for determining the display result of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the range in which the random number for normal symbol determination can be taken is 1 to 250, but the normal symbol determination table is compared with the random number value for normal symbol determination and the determination value is set.

FIG. 14-3 (A) is a normal symbol determination table used in a low base state. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), in the low base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined that the ball is hit by a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened. In the case of hitting or losing a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a loss (time saving symbol A). When it is determined that the time saving symbol A is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 241-250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). When it is determined that the time saving symbol B is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol B, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is a part of the time-saving symbol, and a part of the determination value corresponding to the time-saving symbol is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

Further, in the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, after determining (determining) whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal figure and the time saving symbol is due to a random number error or the like, the normal figure hit can be prioritized. In the low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to use the time-saving symbol than to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, it is first determined whether or not to use the time-saving symbol, and then the normal symbol is used. It may be determined whether or not it is a figure hit.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are provided, and the period of the high base state (end condition, number of time-savings) is different between the case of the time-saving symbol A and the case of the time-saving symbol B. As shown in Fig. 14-4 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol A" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 50 times (time saving number of times). Is 50 times). Further, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times (the number of time saving is 100 times). Therefore, the time saving symbol B is more advantageous to the player than the time saving symbol A.

In this embodiment, whether or not the time-saving symbol is used and the type of the time-saving symbol are determined by the random number value for normal symbol determination when the normal symbol is lost, but different random numbers are used. You may decide whether or not to use the time-saving symbol and the type of the time-saving symbol. Further, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to two types, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving symbol, it is easy to determine the display result by determining whether or not to use the time-saving symbol by the normal symbol determination random value.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the symbol confirmation time for hitting or losing the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time for the time-saving symbol is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to a high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the player being disadvantaged due to lack of preparation. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The fluctuation time for the time-saving symbol B is 15 seconds, and the fluctuation time for other display results is 10 seconds. As a result, the display result can be announced by the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time may be determined according to the display result, or the fluctuation time of all the display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 14-3 (B) is a normal symbol determination table used in a high base state. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), in the high base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined that the ball is hit by a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 7.5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol A). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 241-250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). In the high base state, even if the time reduction symbols (time reduction symbols A and B) are set, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the number of time reductions (end condition of the high base state) is not updated and is controlled. It is designed not to affect the high base state inside. That is, in the high base state, the time saving symbol is treated in the same way as the normal diagram loss. If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened.

In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the display result. As a result, the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be quickly repeated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-3, the fluctuation time is determined according to the display result of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is based on the determined display result of the normal symbol. May be decided. In this case, if the display result is a loss of the normal map, the determination rate of the fluctuation time may be different depending on whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, it is possible to suggest whether or not the time-saving symbol is obtained depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 (A) and 14-3 (B), the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state is 10. It's getting longer, seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to the high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed in the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the player being disadvantaged due to lack of preparation. In addition, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, such notification is not necessary. Therefore, by shortening the symbol confirmation time, the change of the next normal symbol should be executed promptly. Can be done. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types when the display result of the first special figure is a big hit, and the big hit of "big hit A" is provided. After entering the game state, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 50 times (the number of time reductions becomes 50 times), and after the big hit game state of "Big hit B" is reached, 100 times. The high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed (the number of time reductions is 100). It should be noted that the display result of the first special figure becomes a big hit basically when the base is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), "big hit C" is provided as a big hit type when the display result of the second special figure is a big hit, and it is a big hit gaming state of "big hit C". After that, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (the number of time reductions becomes 100 times). It should be noted that the display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit basically at the time of high base.

As described above, in this embodiment, the end condition (number of time reductions) in the high base state (time reduction state) is that the display result of the second special figure is a big hit than the case where the display result of the first special figure is a big hit. It is more advantageous when it becomes. As a result, the player's disappointment can be suppressed because the end condition of the high base state does not become disadvantageous to the player because the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol and shifts to the high base state. In addition, at the time of high base, the end condition of the high base state (time saving state) in the case of a big hit is more advantageous than the low base state, so once the high base state is reached, it is easy to maintain the high base state for a long time. Can be done.

In the feature unit 065AK, it suffices to be controlled to at least a time saving state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the number of rounds of "big hit A" to "big hit C" and the presence or absence of probability variation control are arbitrary. good. Further, the jackpot type and the number of time reductions shown in FIG. 14-5 are examples, and the number of jackpot types and the number of time reductions may be larger or smaller than those in FIG. 14-5, and for example, the number of time reductions may be the same.

FIG. 14-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop processing in step S403 of FIG. 14-2. In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the flag for confirming the normal symbol is set (step 065AKS001). Ordinary symbols are displayed from the time when the display result is derived and displayed until the symbol confirmation time elapses. That is, the symbol confirmation time can be said to be the period from when the display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next fluctuation of the normal symbol is started. If it is the symbol confirmation time, the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set.

If the flag for confirming the normal symbol is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal symbol (confirmed normal symbol) is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The setting for transmitting the designated normal figure stop designation command to the effect control board 12 is executed (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, the effect control board 12 is set to send a normal map stop designation command according to the display result so that the display result of the normal symbol can be specified. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the symbol confirmation period (see FIG. 14-3) according to the normal figure display result are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state. (Step 065AKS005). After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation period of the normal symbol has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, the timer value corresponding to the symbol determination period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted to determine whether or not it becomes 0. If the symbol determination period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the symbol determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012). When the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal symbol process timer is set to the normal electric accessory release time (step 065AKS013), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory release. The value indicating the intermediate processing (for example, "4") is updated (step 065AKS014), and the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the display result is not a normal figure (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether or not the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time saving symbol (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to determine whether or not it is in the high base state (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of the jackpot gaming state, since the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the time saving state based on the time saving symbol is not performed. There is. In addition, when the special symbol is changing and the display result of the change is a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state based on the big hit, so that it is a time saving symbol. The transition to the based time saving state may not be performed.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time saving flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS018), and the time saving number counter is set according to the time saving symbol (see FIG. 14-4 (A)). (Step 065AKS019). As a result, it is possible to shift to a high base state (time saving state). Further, in response to the transition to the time saving state, a setting is made for transmitting a game state designation command for designating the time saving state to the effect control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

When the display result is not a time-saving symbol but a normal drawing loss (step 065AKS015; No), a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020 After executing the process of (step 065AKS021), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (for example, "0"), and the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 14-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S76) shown in FIG. 8 of the feature unit 065AK. In the effect control process process of the feature unit 065AK, in addition to the effect control process process of the basic description shown in FIG. 9, the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) is followed by the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) and the time reduction. The notification setting process (step 065AKS2) is executed.

FIG. 14-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 14-7. The normal symbol interlocking effect is an effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The Fuzu-linked production is included in the predetermined production. In the normal map interlocking effect control process, control is performed to execute the normal map interlocking effect.

In the normal map interlocking effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the normal map interlocking effect is started as a predetermined effect. If the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is confirmed whether or not the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the special figure interlocking effect is started. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special symbol interlocking effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as the predetermined effect. The special figure interlocking effect will be described later. When the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, when the special figure interlocking effect is being executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command has been received (step 065AKS051). If the normal symbol variation start designation command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on, and thus whether or not it is in the high base state. Is confirmed (step 065AKS052). In the case of a high base state (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of fluctuation of the normal symbol is high, and the display result is almost the same as the normal figure. To finish.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is in the jackpot game state is confirmed by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is when the value of the effect control process flag is 6 or more. In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), since the effect during the big hit is not hindered and the high base state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the normal figure interlocking effect is not executed. The figure-linked effect control process ends.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, it is the time when the fluctuation is executed according to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach, and it may be determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the super reach. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, the normal figure interlocking effect control process is terminated without executing the normal figure interlocking effect. Even if the normal map interlocking effect is not executed even during the execution of the effect other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). good.

When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the normal symbol specified from the normal symbol change start designation command.

FIG. 14-8 (C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined effect is an effect that suggests / notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal symbol and the special symbol are lost, and the predetermined effect pattern SP2 Is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "normal figure hit", and a predetermined effect pattern SP3 is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "time saving symbol". The predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns suggesting that the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is more expected to be a big hit than the predetermined effect pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined effects of all the predetermined effect patterns are started in the same manner, and then the results corresponding to the predetermined effect patterns are notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined effect pattern SP1 suggests that the effect is lost, it can be expected that the predetermined effect pattern will be another predetermined effect pattern at the start of the effect.

After suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a Gase pattern suggesting that the pattern may be lost may be provided. For example, a pattern that displays an image such as "maybe it is a time saving?" May be provided.

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the normal figure interlocking effect are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the presence / absence of execution of the normal figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 to SP3 are performed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B). Which one to use is decided. As shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when the display result (normal figure display result) of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the ratio determined to the predetermined effect pattern SP2 is high, and the "normal figure" is determined. In the case of "loss", the ratio of being determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is high, and in the case of "time saving symbol A" or "time saving symbol B", especially in the case of "time saving symbol B" having a large number of time saving times. Is determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP3 at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to suggest and notify the normal map display result by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). The determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-8 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map display result can be suggested and notified by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the normal drawing interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064). If it is not decided to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; No), the normal figure interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When it is decided to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; Yes), the execution time of the normal figure interlocking effect according to the decision result (predetermined effect pattern) in step 065AKS059 is set in the normal figure interlocking effect timer. The value corresponding to is set (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect) is started based on the effect control data or the like corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map interlocking effect, the flag indicating that the normal map interlocking effect is being executed is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the normal map interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer becomes 0. It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal figure interlocking effect timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal figure interlocking effect control process ends.

When the value of the normal figure interlocking effect timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal figure interlocking effect is ended (step 065AKS036), and the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037). ), Ends the normal map interlocking effect control process.

FIG. 14-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure interlocking effect determination process for determining whether or not a special figure interlocking effect is executed as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern when the special figure interlocking effect is executed. The special figure interlocking effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 14-7 before starting the variation of the decorative symbol. In the special figure interlocking effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS091). When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (special figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the high base state by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). ). In the high base state (step 065AKS092; Yes), since the average special figure fluctuation time is short and the period for executing the special figure interlocking effect cannot be secured, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed. The production determination process ends.

Since the special figure interlocking effect determination process is a process executed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the special figure interlocking effect is not determined and executed in the case of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation started this time is a fluctuation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot can be specifically determined by checking the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach out or the super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; No), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach, but the special figure interlocking is performed at a predetermined ratio even when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach. The effect (for example, the predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP1) may be executed.

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the special figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the special figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (B), whether or not to execute the special symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the special figure interlocking effect are SP1, SP4, and SP5. In step 065AKS094, the presence / absence of execution of the special figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 are performed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-9 (B). , SP4, SP5 is determined. As shown in FIG. 14-9 (B), when the special figure display result is "big hit", the ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is high, and when the special figure display result is "miss". , The ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP4 is high. As a result, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the predetermined effect pattern SP5 than in the predetermined effect pattern SP4. Since the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by super reach, it is possible to notify that the predetermined effect patterns will be super reach when the special figure interlocking effect of these predetermined effect patterns is executed. Further, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-9, a big hit may be obtained even when the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is used, so that an unexpected effect can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-9 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special figure display result can be suggested and notified by the special figure interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the special figure interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be provided.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095). When it is decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special figure interlocking effect determination process ends. When it is decided to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; No), a setting is made to execute the special figure interlocking effect corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, the effect control data corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 as usage data. Then, the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure interlocking effect determination process is completed.

FIG. 14-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 14-7. The time saving notification setting process is a process for notifying that the display result of a normal symbol shifts to the time saving state when it is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) corresponding to the time saving symbol. ..

In the time saving notification setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If the normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process ends.

If a normal figure stop specification command for specifying that the time saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time saving flag is on or not to determine whether the time saving symbol is in the high base state. Check whether or not (step 065AKS102). In the high base state (step 065AKS102; Yes), the time saving notification setting process is terminated because the control based on the time saving symbol is not executed.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS102; No), the sub-time reduction flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS103). The sub time saving flag is also set to the on state when the jackpot game state ends and the time saving state is controlled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS104). In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), since the time reduction state is controlled after the big hit game state, the time reduction notification setting process is terminated without notifying that the time reduction state has been entered.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; No), a right-handed display instructing the right-handed to strike at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 is displayed (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), the setting for starting the notification of the transition to the time saving state (time saving transition notification) and the notification of right-handed hitting (right-handed notification). (Step 065AKS107).

Further, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting for starting the right-handed notification is made at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). As described above, in this embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the time reduction shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, and the right-handed hit is performed in the next fluctuation. It is designed to execute notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the super reach from being hindered. It should be noted that the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed even during the execution of the effects other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). It may be. Further, although the shift to the time saving state may have already been performed at the start of the next fluctuation, the time saving shift notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, the right-handed display is displayed, so that it is possible to indicate that the time saving state has been shifted to the minimum, which is disadvantageous because the player cannot grasp the game state. Can be reduced.

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

FIG. 14-11 is a timing chart showing the content of the effect at the time of time reduction transition. In FIGS. 14-11, ON of "special symbol fluctuation" indicates that the special symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopped. ON of "normal symbol fluctuation" indicates that the normal symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the normal symbol is stopped. ON of the "right-handed image" indicates that the right-handed image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-handed image is not displayed.

FIG. 14-11 (A) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 14-11 (A), when the time saving symbol is stopped as a display result of the normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are executed. In addition, a right-handed image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Then, after the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, the time-saving control is started at the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. In this way, by executing the time reduction shift notification and the right-handed notification at the symbol confirmation time of the time reduction symbol before the time reduction control is actually started, even when the time reduction state is entered during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time reduction is performed. It is possible to appropriately notify that the game is to be changed to the state and that the game is to be played by right-handed hitting.

FIG. 14-11 (B) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the time saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving symbol stops at the timing of stopping. The right-handed image is displayed, but the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by super reach, the right-handed notification is executed. If the next fluctuation start timing is after the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, the time is already shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol is stopped during the reach production of the super reach, the next time. The time saving notification is not performed at the start of the fluctuation of. On the other hand, the time saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol elapses after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

If the end timing of the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed when the time-saving symbol is stopped is before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, which is the timing when the time-saving control is actually started, this special symbol is used. Since it is not necessary to rush to execute the time saving shift notification or right-handed notification during the fluctuation of the time saving symbol, the time saving transition notification or right-handed notification is sent after the start of the next special symbol fluctuation and before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol. You may want to do it.

Subsequently, an example of the production operation of the feature unit 065AK will be described. 14-12 to 14-14 show an example of an effect operation of a predetermined effect of the feature unit 065AK. FIG. 14-12 (A) is a downward arrow indicating that the decorative symbol is changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) is executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. The predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be constantly displayed on the image display device 5, or may be displayed when the predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be erased in the high base state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined effect is not executed.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. In FIG. 14-12 (B), it is shown that the effect image is scrolled by the downward arrow. After that, the effect result according to the predetermined effect pattern is notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (C), the effect image of “x” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect fails and the degree of expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or the special symbol is a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (D), the effect image of “◯” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and that the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (E), the effect image of the musical note is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined production is successful, the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is high, and the super reach will be executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (F), the effect image of the characters "heat" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, the predetermined production is successful, and it is notified that the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is higher and that the super reach will be executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (E) and 14-12 (F), the decorative symbols having the same numbers stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and reach. After that, the effect result of the predetermined effect (the effect image of the musical note and the characters of "heat") is displayed. By doing so, when a predetermined effect is executed during the reach, it can be expected to become a super reach.

The predetermined effect patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as the normal figure interlocking effect, and the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as the special figure interlocking effect. Since the normal symbol interlocking effect is executed regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol), it can be executed at any timing during the fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

FIG. 14-13 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect (ordinary figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 14-13 (A) shows that the variation of the decorative symbol is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and a “time-saving rush” is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5. The time saving transition notification is executed when the image of the characters "!" Is displayed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (E), a right-handed notification is executed in which an image of the characters "Aim right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (F), the image of the right-handed notification is erased and the right-handed notification ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol, the time-saving state is entered. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect for notifying that the time saving symbol is stopped, and the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification as shown in FIGS. 14-13 (D) and 14-13 (D) and (E) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the transition to the time saving state. As a result, the player can continue the game without being confused.

FIG. 14-14 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect (general figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed during the reach effect of the super reach. In FIGS. 14-14 (A), the decorative symbols showing the number "7" are stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols are changed in the inner decorative symbol display area 5C. It shows that it is in reach. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is started in the image display device 5.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped during the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but the image display device 5 The time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification in the above are not executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is continuously executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (F), a right-handed notification in which an image of the characters "Aim to the right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. Is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol A. Here, the number of time reductions is subtracted from 50 times to 49 times due to the transition to the time reduction state during the previous fluctuation and the digestion of one fluctuation.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, and the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Is executed. When a big hit is obtained as a result of the super reach, the time is controlled after the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit. Therefore, even if the time saving transition notification is executed during the reach production of the super reach, the notification may be wasted or the production may be annoying, so that the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Then, when the display result is lost, the right-handed notification is executed at the time of the next fluctuation, so that it is possible to preferably notify that the time has been shortened or that the player has right-handed. If the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach and the display result of the fluctuation accompanying the super reach becomes a big hit, the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol. The corresponding notification (time saving transition notification, right-handed notification) may not be executed, or the notification corresponding to the fact that the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol due to the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game state is sent. You may want to do it.

(Modification example of feature part 065AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts and the determination methods of various effects shown in the above-described examples and modifications are merely examples, and the same effects as those of the above-described examples can be obtained. Anything may be used as long as it can be carried out suitably. Further, the effect example shown in the above embodiment is an example, and can be appropriately changed as long as the same effect can be achieved. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the case of pre-reading the display result of the special symbol and executing the pre-read notice effect, if the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol, the execution of the pre-read notice effect may be restricted. For example, when the display result of the normal symbol is the time-saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed until the time-saving symbol is stopped and the time-saving state is entered. In addition, if the display result of the normal symbol before the start of fluctuation is pre-read and there is pending data of the normal symbol that becomes the time saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the special symbol may be restricted. good. By doing so, the game state is changed after the pre-reading notice effect is executed, so that the fluctuation pattern changes between the pre-reading time and the actual fluctuation execution time, which is consistent with the production content of the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

As signals to be externally output to the hall computer or data display, in addition to the big hit signal (output during the big hit) and the special prize medium signal (output during the big hit and during the time reduction), the time reduction medium signal (output only during the time reduction) is provided. May be good.

In the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the big hit game state, the control to the time saving state is not performed, but when the big hit occurs in the low base state, the big hit is obtained. In the corresponding big hit game state, the time saving state may be controlled based on the time saving symbol. In this case, the order is as follows: start of big hit game state → start of time saving control based on the time saving symbol → end of big hit game state, and the base changes before and after the big hit game state. Therefore, the number of time reductions based on the control of the jackpot gaming state may be set at the start of fluctuation after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, if the number of time reductions when a big hit is made in the low base state is 50 or 100 times, and when the number of time reductions when a big hit is made in the high base state is 100 times, the time reduction during the big hit game state is achieved. When the symbol is stopped, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of fluctuation after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to suitably shift to the state even if the game state changes during the big hit. In addition, when the big hit game state is reached, the number of time reductions may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time reductions may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal pattern interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) that suggests / notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol is the effect result by scrolling the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIGS. 14-12 to 14-14), but any effect may be used as long as it can suggest and notify the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. Further, the predetermined effect may be at least an effect of suggesting / notifying whether or not the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol or the display result of the special symbol.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state, the number of time reductions is not updated, but the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state. If this happens, the number of time reductions may be updated or added. In addition, the determination ratio of the number of time reductions and the number of time reductions differs between the case where the display result of the normal symbol is the time saving symbol in the low base state and the case where the display result of the normal symbol is the time reduction symbol in the high base state. You may do it.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification is restricted in a predetermined case such as during the reach production of the super reach, but the time saving symbol is used regardless of the production content during the execution. When shifting to the time saving state accordingly, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed. For example, when the time saving shift notification or the right-handed notification is executed by a display means different from the image display device 5, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed regardless of the effect content of the image display device 5. good.

(Means pertaining to feature 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 065AK is
The special identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) is based on the fact that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which the game medium can easily enter the big winning opening)).
The normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) is variably displayed, and based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes a predetermined result (for example, per normal figure), the normal variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B (for example, the first) A variable control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) that changes the game medium into a predetermined state (for example, an open state) that is easy for the game medium to enter (2 start winning opening)).
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state.
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
The state control means can control the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal identification information is a special result (for example, a time saving symbol) different from the predetermined result (for example, a step). Execute the process of 065AKS018),
The effect executing means includes a specific effect (for example, a predetermined effect of predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure interlocking effect) suggesting that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes the specific display result, and a variable display of the normal identification information. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, a normal figure interlocking effect) that suggests that the display result is the special result.
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state even if the variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result (the normal state). For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means that performs a predetermined notification (for example, a time saving shift notification, a right-handed notification) based on the change of the ordinary variable means to the predetermined state, and a predetermined notification means.
Depending on the effect content during the variable display of the special identification information, a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 065AKS106 and step 065AKS108) may be provided. ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the effect during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the effect executing means, in the normal state, the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the predetermined result, the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the special result, and the variable display result of the special identification information is the above. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests which of the specific display results will be obtained (for example, the predetermined effects of the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5 can be executed. FIGS. 14-12 and 14-13). You may do so.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display results of both the ordinary identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The state control means can be controlled to the special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 14-5).
When the variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state is started, it is controlled based on the fact that the special identification information is controlled to the advantageous state according to whether it is the normal state or the special state. The termination conditions of the special state may be different.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the special result, it takes longer time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation than when the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the predetermined result (for example, FIG. 14-3 (A)) may be used.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
In the case of the normal state, the time from the display of the special result as the variable display result of the normal identification information to the confirmation is longer than in the case of the special state (for example, FIGS. 14-3 (A), (Fig. 14-3 (A)). B)) may be done.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

(Explanation of feature section 079SG)
Next, the feature unit 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 15-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG. As shown in FIG. 15-1, the voice control board 13 in the feature unit 079SG is used for voice synthesis to generate sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. The IC079SG132, the amplification circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and the voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted, and the effect control CPU 120 is from the main board 11. The sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132 based on the effect control command, and the sound corresponding to the sound number data is generated in the voice synthesis IC079SG132.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 individually generates sounds and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R, and causes the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The voice data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting the sound corresponding to the effect performed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. .. That is, these control data are the output modes (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sound effects such as sound effects and BGM (musical pieces) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the effect period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). Is a collection of data including audio data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 15-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying an effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. Further, the lower end portion of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of white circular reserved displays, and the second special figure reserved storage number is outlined. A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. This is the display area for displaying (displaying the number of stored items on hold). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature unit 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 079SG005Sb is configured.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is formed to be less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The left-right width is formed to have the same length as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are formed to be extremely shorter than the height H and the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in the feature unit 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F in the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. ..

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (B), in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated and displayed at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3) around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 15-13) described later to respond to the gaming state and the effect being executed. A message (for example, a message according to the state of the effect such as "XX mode is in progress!" During a specific reach effect) is moved by a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3) from the left to the right. It is possible to display while.

The characters included in the message according to the game state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again from the left to the right. Moved in the direction. Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message according to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can see the message. It is easier to recognize the current game state.

In the feature unit 079SG, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T have different constant speeds. It may be rotatable and movable with.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb blink alternately at regular intervals. Indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variable display result is off, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a miss. In that case, both are lit (turned on) at the end timing of the variable display.

The display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new reserved storage occurs and the timing when a new variable display is started. Only the number changes. That is, the display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U. , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is imaged by arranging another image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 (A) to 15-3 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth This is data drawn to display the symbol 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn for displaying a small symbol of the image data 1 decorative symbol in the first display area 079SG005F (on the left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the image data 2 is data drawn for displaying the images of the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. ..

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 (A) to 15-3 (C), the image data 1, the image data 2, and the image data 3 have display priorities for displaying an image on the image display device 5. Is set. As for the display priority, the image data 1 is set to the highest and the image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3). .. That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image of a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are displayed with priority.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (D), when the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image data 3 Since the image based on is displayed as the image of the lowest layer, at least a part of the image based on the image data 3 becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

Although details will be described later in this feature unit 079SG, the image based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose progress speed is always constant, while on the image data 3. The based image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a plurality of moving speed moving images or still images based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, although details will be described later, it is possible to display a moving image of the reach effect at a normal progress speed V1 and a progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than the V1 during the reach effect of the super reach. It has become. This is because the data for the production moving image displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the production movie displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Only the data for the production video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and a part of the production video of the reach production is set to the progress speed V2 by performing a predetermined process on the data. It may be possible to display it.

In this way, in the feature unit 079SG, the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is set to V1 by setting the image progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect video changes, to the first speed, which is the non-slow motion period and the image. By setting the progress speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set to the second speed at which the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is slow. That is, the slow motion video, which is a production video in which the progress speed of the production in the feature unit 079SG is slow, is the video progress as compared with the non-slow motion video whose video progress speed is V1 displayed in front of the slow motion video. Anything with a slow speed will do.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see FIGS. 15-18 to 15-25), but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the content of the effect moving image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 15-18 to 15-25, but the video progress speed. Does not change from V1 to V2, that is, the slow motion period does not occur. By executing the super reach effect, the slow motion period is achieved in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 15-18 to 15-25. May be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super reach effect in which the content of the effect movie is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect movie is a second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. Is that, by displaying the production video having the same content at the video progress speed V2, which is slower than the video progress speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach production, for a longer period than the non-slow motion super reach production. The displayed production video corresponds to this.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG configures a slow motion effect in which the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing the video advance speed of the effect moving image, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the output of the above is illustrated as a form that does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the speakers 8L, 8R do not change the video progress speed of the production moving image (V1 remains). By conversely increasing the reproduction speed of the sound output from the speaker and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that the player feels that the progress speed of the reach effect has slowed down may be configured.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG includes a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying the effect moving image, and the progress speed of the effect by at least one of these effect output means. Is different between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period, so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is slow motion in the slow motion period.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect video of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is not limited to this. The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect can be changed (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases or decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 15-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later, for example. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 15-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in the feature unit 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 15-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 15-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 079SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature part 079SG) (about 1 in the main feature part 079SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 15-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 15-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 079SG sets the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 15-7 (B). In the feature unit 079SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", "Probability change big hit C" which are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to the low accuracy high base state. A "non-probability change jackpot" to be transferred is set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called as a "non-probable variable jackpot" and may be referred to as a two-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 079SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A, the probabilistic jackpot B, and the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. .. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a big hit state in which a small number of winning balls can be obtained is avoided, and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 15-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In the feature unit 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 079SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG also includes a fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 15-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In this feature unit 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 15-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table have different numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in this feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system, are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot. Since it is determined to be, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern out of super reach β3).

That is, when the variable display result is "out of place" in the feature unit 079SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-8, the reach effect of the super reach α1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach effect described later is executed. The reach effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the reach effect of the super reach α2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half part and the second half part of the first reach effect described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the reach effect of the super reach α3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit or a miss by executing the second reach effect described later after executing the first half portion and the second half part of the effect.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 15-8 and 15-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit is executed by the first reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit after executing the first half of the third reach effect described later. Yes, in the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-4), the variable display result is out of alignment after executing the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. The reach effect of the super reach β3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. After that, the fourth reach effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 15-8 and 15-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit after being executed up to the fourth reach effect is executed by the third reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In the present feature unit 079SG, the embodiment in which the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The second reach effect and the fourth reach effect may be performed by themselves.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, each reach effect can be executed by a combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect during the variable display, and can be executed by the combination of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third). A case may be provided in which the execution is performed by a combination of reach effects and the like).

Further, in the present feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 15-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation pattern of (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). A part of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β system (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α system (variation pattern PA2- 2. The jackpot expectation may be lower than any of PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 079SG has a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 15-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 15-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 079SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 079SG153, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 15-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 079 SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 079SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 079SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 079SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 079SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. The reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the 1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold memory number notification command (the first) Two commands (1 hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A associate these start opening winning designation commands with the hold storage number notification command. , A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 079SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The hold memory number notification command will be stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 079 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079 SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS102; N). Step 079 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 079 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079 SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS105; N). Step 079 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 079 SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 079 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 079 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 079 SGS110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079 SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings for sending the number notification command (step 079 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079 SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079 SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 15-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 079SG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U after executing the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161), and these first Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to be performed and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Executes the processing of.

15-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the top (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chance eyes. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079 SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). Executes the chance-up effect determination process (step 079 SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the latter half of the first reach effect or the second half of the third reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-15, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the feature unit 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chan-up effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-32, the feature unit 079SG is provided with only one effect pattern as the effect mode of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided as an effect mode of the chance-up effect, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which effect pattern the chance-up effect is executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-32, there is only one production start timing of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is not limited to this. A plurality of production start timings of the production may be provided, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which production start timing the chance-up production is started.

Further, after the execution / non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined in step 079 SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079 SGS279). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss) is performed after the second reach effect is completed. In the period until the notification effect) is started, the still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 15-16 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is out of alignment. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern SG-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 15-16 (B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 stops the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. It is an effect pattern to be displayed as an image, and the still image display effect pattern SG-2 is after displaying the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , It is an effect pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, when the second reach effect is executed, is the still image display effect executed in the pattern SG-2? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

Further, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step 079SGS281; N). Step S079SGS282). When the variable display variation pattern is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079 SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 079 SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach β3 variation pattern (step 079 SGS281; Y). ), The operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. ..

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 15-17 (A), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 80% SS. It is determined to be -1, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 15-17 (B), the operation promotion effect pattern SS-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and is an operation promotion pattern. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

That is, as the operation promotion effect in the feature unit 079SG, when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2). When the image of the push button 31B of a normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1), the ratio is higher. Since the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (the big hit notification effect is executed) is high, the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, and operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and the variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079 SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079 SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079 SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079 SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction is timered out. Determine if it has been done. Then, if the process timer after subtraction is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after subtraction is timer-out, the process data The production device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data by switching and starting the next process timer.

Next, an effect mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-18 to 15-35.

First, with respect to the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. 15-18, 15-19, and 15-26 (A) to 15-26 (G), when the variable display is started, an image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. NS. Hereinafter, the blinking and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all blinked and lit in synchronization. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-18, 15-19, and 15-26 (A) to 15-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, when the first half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 15-18 and 15-26 (E) to 15-26 (G). In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, after a video in which the attack of the ally character A is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state. It is notified that it will be done. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-26 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character A succeeds is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIGS. 15-26 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 15-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIGS. 15-26 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2 or super reach α3, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 and 15-26 (D). , The attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-19 and 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect is executed, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 15-27 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α2, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 and 15-27 (E) to 15-27 (G) when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is completed. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, after the attack of the ally character A fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the decorative symbol stops with a combination of out-of-orders and the variable display result is out of order. Is notified.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. NS.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21 and 15-27 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the first reach effect. The attack of character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, the first half of the second reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21 and 15-28 (A) to 15-28 (B), when the first half execution period of the second reach effect is entered, the ally character A and the enemy character B become Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the first half execution period of the second reach effect is approached, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21 and 15-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect effect. The display of the concentrated line is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-mentioned effect effect is gradually increased and displayed.

That is, in the latter half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, and 15-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image (the image immediately before the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the feature unit 079SG) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from the left to the right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing, and the BGM, the effect sound, and the like are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the video of the battle effect. It returns to the cycle before the speed drops to V2.

When the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-29 (E), the battle effect is performed as the still image display effect. The color of the image displayed at the end of is reversed. Then, after the end of the still image display effect in which the colors are reversed, as a jackpot notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B collapses, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 15-20, a moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is performed at the progress speed V1. Although it is displayed, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image in which the decorative symbol stops in the combination of big hits after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and FIG. 15-30 (A). )-As shown in FIGS. 15-30 (D), when the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. 15-30 (F) to 15-30 (H), the miss notification is announced. The production may be executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1 is as shown in FIG. 15-20, the same as the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B collapses, it is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-30 (E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1, the attack of the ally character A does not hit the enemy character B, and the attack of the enemy character B is conversely the attack of the ally character A. After a hit and the ally character A collapses, the decorative symbol stops in a combination of being off, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As an out-of-order notification effect, as shown in FIG. 15-21, a moving image until the attack of the ally character A is not hit and is defeated by the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-30 (I), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in FIGS. 15-22, 15-23, and 15-31 (A) to 15-31 (H), when the variable display is started, the image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. NS.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, 15-23, and 15-31 (A) to 15-31 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half execution period of the third reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 15-22 and 15-31 (E) to 15-31 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, it is notified that after a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 15-30 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 15-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits and controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 15-30 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2 or super reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 15-23 and 15-31 (D). , The attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-23 and 15-32 (A) to 15-32 (B), when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 15-32 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small design is displayed with priority over the production video of the chance-up effect, while the production video of the chance-up effect is the image shown in the decorative design (FIGS. 15-32 (B)). It is displayed with priority over "7") displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. Therefore, in this feature unit 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbol, and display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbol with priority over the symbol, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chan-up effect in the image display device 5.

In this feature section 079SG, the production video of the chance-up effect is displayed with priority over the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed from the production video of the chance-up effect. May be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect during execution has evolved from, so that the game interest can be improved.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 15-23 and 15-32 (E) to 15-32 (G) when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is completed. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order after the attack of the ally character B fails and the enemy character A is defeated as an out-of-order notification effect.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character B fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. NS.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, 15-25 and 15-32 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the third reach effect. Character B's attack succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the first half of the fourth reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-24, 15-25, and 15-33 (A) to 15-33 (B), when the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is entered, the ally character AB and the enemy character B The battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the latter half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 15-24, 15-25, and 15-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently as the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 causes the battle effect. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, the operation promotion effect is executed. When the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1, the push button 31B together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of the meter 079SG005M is started, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral edge of the image display device 5 are started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 15-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 15-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. The update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle effect is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (D) and 15-33 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 (A) to 15-34 (E), when the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-2, the first display of the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, and the meter 079SG005M suggesting the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B are displayed. Then, the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 15-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 15-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb makes it possible to notify the player. Most of the images of the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than that in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-34 (D) and 15-34 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set). When it ends), the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed from the timing when the players operate the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As a big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-24 and 15-35 (A) to 15-35 (C), a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B is Although it is displayed at the progress speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B has fallen is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as the disengagement notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 and 15-35 (E) to 15-35 (G), the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B collapses, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. In particular, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-25, a moving image until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbol stops due to the combination of missed is displayed at the traveling speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

15-26 (H), 15-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 15-30 (E), 15-30 (I), 15-31 (H), FIG. As shown in 15-32 (H), 15-35 (D), and 15-35 (H), in the feature unit 079SG, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. The form in which the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display itself of the telop display area 079SG005T on the image display device 5 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T itself may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, in the variable display of the super reach α3 and the super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 is used only during the slow motion period immediately before the notification effect (the period during which the display of the effect movie of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2). Although the embodiment of shortening the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Further, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened even in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 to 15-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the first half execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the partial execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional transfer of the player to the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and the jackpot notification is given. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the production will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, the BGM and the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. Since the output remains unchanged at V4, which is the normal playback speed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, since the sound output hand in the feature unit 079SG includes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, the reproducibility is achieved during variable display including execution of reach effect and execution of jackpot game. It is possible to output high-quality BGM (musical music), sound effects, and other directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, 15-24, and 15-25, the game effect is exhibited during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Since the lamp 9 blinks at a shorter cycle than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach effect and the fourth reach effect. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first reach effect to the fourth reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 to 15-25, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the telop are both constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which both the rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display or telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-18 to 15-25, in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the rotation display of the hold display is at the rotation speed V3 during the period other than the reach effect. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the telop movement display is executed at the movement speed V3, that is, the rotation display of the hold display and the telop movement display are executed at the same speed as during the reach production, so that the player can perform the telop movement display. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time the display ends, the telop display area is displayed. Since it is displayed again at the left end of the 079SG005T and moved from the left to the right again, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this and moves in the telop display area 079SG005T. Some of the displayed telops may be invisible to the player at some time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, and 15-28, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the effect movie of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the image is displayed. By executing the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the display device 5, the effect effect of the latter half of the second reach effect can be enhanced by the effect effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 (C) and 138 (D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses. It is possible for the player to more easily recognize that the second reach effect is completed and the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed due to the increase.

Although the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the effect effect in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, and the like. The output of the specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as the effect effect, and the second reach effect ( As the battle effect progresses, the effect level of the effect effect is gradually increased (for example, the operating range of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, and the stick. The vibration of the controller 31A and the push button 31B may be increased, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased, and the like).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-26 (G), 15-29 (E), 15-30 (D), 15-31 (G), and 15-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the player is made to recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled while further improving the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa. It can be done easily.

When executing the jackpot notification effect, the feature unit 079SG hides the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. The first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa exemplify a mode in which an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa is used. In a state where the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first). 2 In the display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlapping with the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are transparently displayed or reduced, or the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the hold display displayed in the hold display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. 15-20 and FIGS. As shown in 15-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and FIG. 15-2. Since the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, the hold display is being displayed and the telop movement display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. Can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the hold display and the display of the telop by stopping the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-16 and 15-29 (A) to 15-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, the colors of the still image are reversed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In the feature unit 079SG, as a still image display effect, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, a form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified. The form of changing the color of the still image is not limited to that of changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only a part of the color of the still image, and adding a new color to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-29 (B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in the pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, the player is displayed in these second display areas 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature unit 079SG, a pattern that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect or the third reach effect, and the first reach effect or the third reach effect. Since there is a pattern in which the variable display that shifts to the second reach production and the fourth reach production ends after the production is executed, the display of the production video of the reach production progresses during the first reach production and the third reach production. Whether or not to shift to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after being executed at the speed V2, and the display of the effect video of the reach effect during the second reach effect or the third reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-19, 15-20, 15-21, 15-23, 15-24, and 15-25, the first reach effect and the third reach effect are performed during the first reach effect. During the 1st reach production second half execution period and the 3rd reach production second half execution period, the production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the 1st reach production second half execution period or the 3rd reach production second half execution period proceed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period or from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period. However, in the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the expectation that the ally character is controlled to the jackpot game state by being different from the progress speed of the production in which the enemy character is defeated is excessively raised. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, FIGS. 15-18, 15-20, 15-22, 15-24, 15-25 and 15-26 (E) to 15-26 (G), 15-29 (C). 15-29 (E), 15-30 (B) to 15-30 (D), 15-31 (E) to 15-31 (G), 15-35 (A). As shown in 15-35 (C), in the jackpot notification effect of this feature unit 079SG, while the video is displayed at the progress speed V2 when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack of the ally character, while it is executed. 15-19, 15-21, 15-23, 15-25 and 15-27 (E) to 15-27 (G), 15-30 (F) to 15-30 (H). ), FIGS. 15-32 (E) to 15-32 (G), and 15-35 (D) to 15-35 (F). Since the display of is executed at the progress speed V1, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the disengagement notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from increasing excessively, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result of the super reach is the deviation notification effect, the display of the effect video of the deviation notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the effect moving image of the off notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the production of the out-of-court notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the feature unit 079SG, an example is exemplified in which the traveling speed V1 of the production moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the third speed in the present invention, and the traveling speed V2 of the effecting moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Further, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as the speed is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-24 and 15-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the execution of the operation promotion effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect may be executed at the progress speed V1. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

Further, as the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but the notification effect is not progressed. .. Further, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Then, the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (until the operation promotion effect ends), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the push button 31B is controlled to the jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period.

Although the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is other than the push button 31B such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means of the above, sensors such as a motion sensor and a touch sensor that can detect the movement of the player may be used.

In addition, FIGS. 15-18, 15-20, 15-22, 15-24 and 15-26 (E) to 15-26 (G), 15-29 (C) to 15-29. (E), FIGS. 15-30 (B) to 15-30 (D), 15-31 (E) to 15-31 (G), 15-35 (A) to 15-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification effect in the feature unit 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is the progress speed V2. It is displayed in. On the other hand, FIGS. 15-19, 15-21, 15-23, 15-25 and 15-27 (E) to 15-27 (G), 15-30 (E) to 15- As shown in 30 (G), FIGS. 15-32 (E) to 15-32 (G), and 15-35 (D) to 15-35 (F), the disengagement notification effect of the feature unit 079SG is produced. The moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is not displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player can be impressed that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by displaying a part of the effect movie of the jackpot notification effect at the progress speed V2. can.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed by the pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which the colors are inverted). Therefore, as a still image display effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 is a special effect in the present invention is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is not limited to this. , An effect other than the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

Further, in the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, the pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is imitated in the first display area 079SG005F and the push button 31B imitating the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed by any effect pattern of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized in the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is concealed by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-17, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the jackpot ratio, the player can pay attention to whether the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the game interest can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, 15-25 and 15-33 (C) to 15-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image is displayed. While the 079SG005Ba is being displayed, the display of the production video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb causes the traveling speed V2 (slow motion). ) Has illustrated a form in which the visibility of the production video (battle production) of the fourth reach effect is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is the pattern SS. When executed in -2, in addition to the display of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the production video (battle) of the fourth reach effect is displayed. The production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the production video (battle production) of the 4th reach production is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion production pattern SS-2, the production video of the 4th reach production The display may be executed at the traveling speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the reach effect of the super reach, the second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Further, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the variable display of the super reach β1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach effect and then the second half of the first reach effect to notify the deviation, and the second half of the third reach after the first half of the third reach effect. Variable display of super reach β2 that executes the partial execution period and notifies the deviation, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to execute the variable display of the super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach effect after When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, the production video of each reach production is executed at the progress speed V2, and the first reach production first half execution period is started. When shifting to the second half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the second half of the reach effect to the first half of the reach effect, the first half of the third reach effect to the second half of the reach effect When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, the third reach When shifting from the first half of the production period to the second half of the third reach production, and when shifting from the second half of the third reach production to the first half of the fourth reach production, the player feels uncomfortable. It can be prevented from being stored. Further, by displaying the effect video of each reach effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branch of the reach effect drawn by the player.

The variable display of the super reach of the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which two reach effects can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach is 3 or more. The reach effect may be executable, or only one reach effect may be executable.

Although the feature portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach, and a part of the effect movie of the reach effect is provided in all of these reach effects. Although the embodiment in which the display of the above is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the production moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2 in each reach production (a pattern in which the display of the production video is not executed at the progress speed V2. A pattern in which the display of the production moving image is always executed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the production movie is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the effect contents may be different between the reach effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the reach effect in which the display of the effect moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the reach production of the super reach, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R always has a constant playback speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the production video is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the output form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach are shown. In the first half of each reach production second half of the production, the playback speed V4 from the speakers 8L, 8R as in the first half of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While the production sound is output at, what is V4 in the latter half of each reach production (slow motion period) of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production? The production sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5 slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect sound on the reach effect by making the reproduction speed of the effect sound different while the display of the effect video of the reach effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb cannot be reduced while the property can be reduced, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, when it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37, after the end of the reach effect. , The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as a part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 (A) to 15-36 (D), when the second reach effect is executed, when the second reach effect is completed together with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb as a part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 15-36 (E) and 15-36 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-37 (A) to 15-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes. When the operation promotion effect is completed without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed second as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 15-37 (E) and 15-37 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while the second display area is shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37. After the end of the reach effect or after the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Does not change, so that the player can easily recognize the timing when the notification effect is set by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be improved. Since it does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

Further, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), and is the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sa. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the first display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are not changed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by executing toward the area 079SG005Sb, it is possible to make it difficult to change the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the present modification 079SG-2, a mode in which the operation promotion effect is executed during the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. It may be executed as a part.

When the operation promotion effect is executed as a part of the notification effect, it is the same as the modified example 079SG-2 as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (A) to 15-38 (F) as the modified example 079SG-3. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (D), the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect. do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the end of the operation promotion effect without operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot game state. Is notified that it is not controlled.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data. Since the visibility of the push button 31B is not lowered, the operation promotion effect can be made to stand out with respect to the fourth reach effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the variable display result is always a big hit when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always specified. The probability variation jackpot (furthermore, the probability variation jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player) may be set. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot game state is controlled again after the miss notification effect is once executed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that notifies. In the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 in this way, the big hit type is a probable big hit and a non-probable big hit (non-probable big hit). A case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and a case where the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, a form of displaying a message indicating a game state is exemplified as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited to this. As the displayed telop, even if it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, and the like can be displayed. good.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a telop can be displayed according to the state of the effect being executed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited thereto. The telops displayed in are those that can identify the game state, the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (big hit expectation), the explanation of the effect during execution (especially the reach effect), and the reach effect. It may be a notice effect or the like that can be executed from a timing earlier than that.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion) is performed during the period when the moving image of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the embodiment (display of image 079SG005Bb) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the operation promotion effect, not only the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, but also the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, for example. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are duplicated and displayed to promote the operation. You may execute the effect that 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed.

When the effect of moving the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect is executed, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are displayed. The moving display speed of the image display device 5 may decrease as it approaches the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, 15-24, and 15-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the traveling speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from that when the reach effect video display is executed at the progress speed V1. You may. For example, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, 15-24, and 15-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the video of the reach effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, 15-29, 15-30, 15-31, and 15-35, as an effect mode of the jackpot notification effect, the reach effect is completed. Later, a form in which the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach production.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of production sounds such as BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to. By doing so, when the player sets the output of the effect sound that suits his / her own taste, the speaker 8L is displayed when the display of the moving image of each reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1. , Since the effect sound output from 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without changing, the effect sound is reproduced from the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the low-speed playback.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. The variable display result is always out of alignment when is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. After the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is once switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the effect indicating that the variable display result is a big hit. A case may be provided in which (for example, a resurrection effect) is executed.

When executing the revival effect in this way, the revival effect is performed for the player by lighting and blinking the game effect lamp 9 before displaying the moving image of the revival effect on the image display device 5. May be made aware that is executed. Further, as an effect mode of the revival effect, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when executing the resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene in which an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. May be good.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous for the player. When is set, even if the variable display result is out of order in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other set values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. good. By doing so, the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is out of order while suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest due to the variable display result being out of place in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It will be possible.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. It may be a slot machine or a general game machine other than the pachinko game machine 1 as long as it performs the above.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time saving state by stopping and displaying the time saving symbol like the feature part 059AK, the small hit game state ends based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 like the feature part 063AK. Then, it may be controlled to shorten the time for a predetermined period. In addition to this, even when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the normal symbol as in the feature unit 065AK, the time-saving state may be controlled. According to this, the opportunity to be controlled to the time saving state increases, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, for example, the feature unit includes a time-saving fanning effect in the feature unit 059AK, a normal time-passing fanning effect and a time-saving time-passing fanning effect in the feature unit 063AK, a predetermined effect in the feature unit 065AK, and a reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C. It may be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, in the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and the predetermined effect after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image, which is the second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed, on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the first period. In any of the second period and the second period, the speed related to the effect sound may be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means. According to this, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A 1st special symbol display device, 4B 2nd special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative symbol display area, 6A winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start port switch, 23 count switch, 25A 1st hold indicator, 25B 2nd hold indicator, 25C normal figure hold indicator, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81,82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 Random circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
A light emitting means for notifying that the game medium is launched toward the second flow path is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
Moreover,
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means
The deciding means for determining the advantageous state and
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
Includes an information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. ,
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result.
The determination means can determine that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the special state.
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is set.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information.
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images